Welcome aboard your vehicle

This driver’s handbook contains the information necessary:

– for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and
the technical developments it incorporates.
– to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular main-
tenance.
– to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.
It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains
about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too
pleased to provide you with any additional information.
To help you, you will find the following symbols:

  and Visible on the vehicle, they show that you should consult the manual to find detailed information and/or limits
on operations in respect of equipment on your vehicle.

anywhere in the manual indicates a hazard, danger or a safety recommendation.

The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This hand-
book covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are
fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.
This manual may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.
The diagrams in the user manual are provided as examples only.

Enjoy driving your new vehicle.

Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the car manufacturer.

0.1
0.2
 C O N T E N T S
Sections

Getting to know your vehicle ............................... 1

Driving ................................................................... 2
Your comfort ......................................................... 3
Maintenance ......................................................... 4
Practical advice .................................................... 5
Technical specifications ...................................... 6
Alphabetical index ............................................... 7

0.3
0.4
 Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle
Key, radio frequency remote control: general information, use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Card: general information, use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Locking and unlocking the doors and tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Automatic locking when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Opening and closing the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Headrests - Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Methods of restraint in addition to the front seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
Side protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33
Additional methods of restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34
Child safety: general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35
Choosing a child seat mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38
Fitting a child seat, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41
Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.43
Deactivating, activating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.51
Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.54
Instrument panel: warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.70
Displays and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.76
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.78
Steering wheel, Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.91
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.93
Clock and outdoor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.95
Audible and visual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.97
Exterior lighting and signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.98
Adjusting the headlight beam height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.102
Screen washer, wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.104
Fuel tank (filling with fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.108
Reagent tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.114
1.1
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (1/2)
A B 4 C 4
1
3 3

2 2

Key A 6 Ignition and front door key.

8 Locking/unlocking of the boot only.
1 Coded key for ignition switch, doors
and fuel filler cap. Remote control with switchblade
key:
7 Locking/unlocking using the switch- D
Radio frequency remote
blade key. To release the insert from
control B or C or D its housing, press button 7, it comes 32 6
2 Locks all the opening elements. out automatically. Press button 7 and
3 Unlocks all the opening elements. guide the insert back into its housing. 2
4 Coded key for ignition switch, driv- 5 7
er’s door and fuel filler cap.
5 Remote engine start-up.
6

7
8 3
2
5
1.2
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (2/2)
The remote control unit Driver’s responsibility
operating range when parking or stopping
This varies according to the environ- the vehicle
ment. It is therefore important when Never leave an animal,
handling the remote control to ensure child or adult who is not self-suffi-
that you do not lock or unlock the ve- Replacement and additional keys
cient alone on your vehicle, even for or remote controls
hicle by inadvertently pressing the but- a short time.
tons. If you lose your remote control key
They may pose a risk to themselves or require another, you can obtain
Note: if a door or the tailgate is open or to others by starting the engine,
or not closed properly, there is a quick one from an approved dealer.
activating equipment such as the If a remote control or key is re-
method for locking then unlocking them electric windows or by locking the
quickly. placed, it will be necessary to take
doors. the vehicle and all of its remote
Interference Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, control keys to an authorised
please remember that the tempera- dealer to reset them.
Interference by factors in the immediate You may use up to four remote con-
ture inside the passenger compart-
vicinity (external installations or the use trol keys per vehicle.
ment increases very quickly.
of equipment operating on the same
frequency as the card) may disrupt its RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS Remote control key failure
operation. INJURY.
Make sure that the correct battery
type is being used, and that the
battery is in good condition and in-
serted correctly. These batteries
have a service life of approximately
two years.
Refer to the information on “Radio
frequency remote control: Batteries”
in Section 5.

The key must not be used for any Advice

function other than those described
in the handbook (removing the cap Avoid leaving the remote control in
from a bottle, etc.). hot, cold or humid areas.

1.3
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: use
Locking the doors
Press locking button 1.
The hazard warning lights and side in-
2 dicator lights flash twice to indicate
that the doors have locked.
1 If a door or the tailgate is open or not
properly shut, the doors and tailgate
lock then quickly unlock and the hazard Driver’s responsibility
warning lights and side indicator lights when parking or stopping
do not flash. the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
Unlocking the doors They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
Press unlocking button 2. activating equipment such as the
The hazard warning lights and side in- electric windows or by locking the
dicator lights flash once to indicate that doors.
the doors have unlocked. Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.

If the vehicle has been unlocked The key must not be used for any
but neither the doors or tailgate are function other than those described
open, it locks again automatically in the handbook (removing the cap
after two minutes. from a bottle, etc.).

1.4
CARD: general information (1/3)
The card is used for: card operating range
– locking/unlocking the opening ele- This varies according to the environ-
1 ments (doors, boot); ment: take care not to accidentally lock
or unlock the vehicle by inadvertently
4 – switching on the vehicle lighting re-
pressing the buttons on the card.
motely (refer to the following pages);
– starting the engine (refer to the in- Note: if a door or the tailgate is open or
2 not closed properly, the doors and tail-
formation on “Starting the engine” in
Section 2). gate lock then unlock quickly.
3
Interference
Battery life Interference by factors in the immediate
Make sure that the correct battery type vicinity (external installations or the use
is being used, and that the battery is of equipment operating on the same
in good condition and inserted cor- frequency as the card) may disrupt its
rectly. Its service life is approximately operation.
1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate. two years: replace it when the mes-
2 Locking all doors and tailgate. sage “Keycard Battery Low” appears
3 Unlocking/locking the boot. on the instrument panel (refer to sec-
tion “Card: battery” in Section 5).
4 Switching on the lighting remotely or,
depending on the vehicle, starting
the engine remotely. Remote engine start-up
(depending on vehicle)
Press button 4 to activate the remote
engine start-up. Please refer to the in-
formation on “Remote engine start-up”
in Section 2. When the battery is flat, you can
still lock/unlock and start your ve-
hicle. Refer to the information on
“Locking/unlocking the doors” in
Section 1 and “Starting the engine”
in Section 2.

1.5
CARD: general information (2/3)

Advice
4 Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or
humid areas.
Do not keep the card in a place
where it could be bent or dam-
aged accidentally, such as in a back Driver’s responsibility
pocket of a garment.
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not
self-sufficient alone in your
vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
Distance lighting function or to others by starting the engine,
Pressing button 4 switches on the in- activating equipment such as the
terior lighting, the side lights and the electric windows or locking the
Replacement: need for an doors, for example.
dipped beam headlights for approxi-
additional card
mately 20 seconds. This can be used, Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
for example, to identify your vehicle If you lose your card or require an- please remember that the tempera-
from a distance when parked in a car other, you can obtain one from an ture inside the passenger compart-
park. authorised dealer. ment increases very quickly.
Note: Pressing button 4 again switches If a card is replaced, it will be nec-
off the lighting. RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
essary to take the vehicle and all INJURY.
its cards to an approved Dealer to
re-set the system.
You may use up to four cards per
vehicle.

1.6
CARD: general information (3/3)

5
A

7
8

6
Fitting a hand strap 7 Insert the hand strap into the compo-
nent 8 and pass the end of the strap
Slide the rear casing 5 downwards through the buckle.
while pressing on zone A.
Position the strap at the 6 opening and
close the cartridge.
Note: Check that the diameter of the
hand strap cord 7 will fit the opening 6.

Never insert screwdriver-type tools

into the opening 6.

1.7
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use (1/4)
There are two ways to unlock/lock the
vehicle:
– the card in “hands-free” mode;
– the card in remote control mode.

Driver’s responsibility
Never leave an animal, 1
child or adult who is not
self-sufficient alone in your
vehicle, even for a short time. Using the card in “hands-
They may pose a risk to themselves free” mode
or to others by starting the engine,
Never leave your vehicle In “hands-free” mode, it is possible to
activating equipment such as the
with the card inside. lock/unlock the vehicle without using
electric windows or locking the
any of the card buttons, as long as the
doors, for example.
card is within the access zone 1.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera- Note: if the vehicle has not been used
ture inside the passenger compart- for more than 8 days, the hands-free
ment increases very quickly. system switches to standby. To reacti-
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS vate it, press the unlocking button on
INJURY. the card.

Do not store the card anywhere it

may come into contact with other
electronic equipment (computer,
phone etc.) as this could hinder its
operation.

1.8
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use (2/4)
Remote “Hands-free” locking
With the card on you, and doors and
tailgate closed, move away from the ve-
hicle: it will lock automatically once you
have left the access zone.
Note: The distance at which the vehicle
locks depends on the surroundings.
To indicate unlocking by two flashes
of the hazard warning lights, indicators
and by the illumination of the front and
2
rear side lights.
The locking is confirmed by a beep.
1
“Hands-free” unlocking Special features of the locking
Card in zone 1, the vehicle will unlock. system

To indicate unlocking by one flash of If a door is open or not properly closed,

the hazard warning lights, indicators when you go away, the vehicle is not
and by the illumination of the front and locked.
rear side lights. If the card has been within range for
approximately 15 minutes, remote lock-
ing is disabled.
The vehicle will not lock if a card is in
area 2. If you unlock the vehicle by
pressing the button on the card but do
not open the doors or the boot, “hands-
free” remote locking is disabled.

1.9
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use (3/4)
Locking using the card
With the doors and boot closed, press
3 button 4. The vehicle will lock. The
hazard warning lights and rear indica-
tor lights flash twice to indicate that the
vehicle is locked.
4 Note: The maximum distance at which
the vehicle locks depends on the sur-
roundings.

Special features
If an opening element (a door or the
luggage compartment) is open or not
properly closed, the vehicle cannot be
locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in
Using the card as a remote quick succession, but the hazard warn-
control ing lights and the side indicator lights
will not flash.
Unlocking with the card If you press button 4 for more than
Press button 3. 5 seconds, “hands-free” mode is disa-
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of bled until the next time you unlock the
the hazard warning lights and the indi- vehicle by pressing button 3.
cator lights.
Activation or deactivation of “hands-
If there is then an attempt trying to open free” mode is indicated by a beep.
a door by pressing the handle at the
same time as the doors are unlocked
remotely, the door concerned will
remain locked. To rectify this, release
the handle and unlock the vehicle again
by pressing the 3 button on the card.

The card buttons are deactivated

when the engine is running.

1.10
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use (4/4)

Driver’s responsibility
5 when parking or stopping
2 the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
If, while the engine is running, a door Locking/unlocking only the They may pose a risk to themselves
is opened and closed, and the card is or to others by starting the engine,
boot activating equipment such as the
no longer in the zone 2, the message
“Keycard Not Detected” indicates that Press the button 5 to lock/unlock the electric windows or locking the
the card is not inside the vehicle. This boot only. doors, for example.
will, for example, prevent you from driv- Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
ing away after dropping off a passenger please remember that the tempera-
who has kept the card on them. ture inside the passenger compart-
The warning disappears when the card ment increases very quickly.
is detected again. RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.

1.11
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS AND TAILGATE (1/3)
If the remote control or,
depending on the vehicle, the 2
1
card does not work
In some cases, the radio frequency
remote control or the card may not A
work:
– card/radio frequency remote control
battery worn or run flat, vehicle bat-
tery flat etc.
– use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
It is then possible:
– depending on the vehicle, use the The card’s built-in key
radio frequency remote control or The integrated 2 key is used to lock or
the emergency key integrated in the unlock the front left-hand door if the
card to unlock the front left-hand card does not work.
door;
– to lock each of the doors manually; Access with key 2
– to use the interior door locking/un-
Slide the rear casing 1 downwards
locking control (refer to the following
while pressing on zone A.
pages).

1.12
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS AND TAILGATE (2/3)

5
4

2 3 3

Using the key integrated in Vehicles with key/remote Interior locking/unlocking

the card control door control
Insert the key 2 into the lock 3 and lock Using the key Depending on the vehicle, it can be
or unlock the front left-hand door. used to simultaneously lock or unlock
Insert the key 4 into the lock 3 and lock the four doors and the boot. Lock or
Once you are inside the vehicle, put the or unlock the front left-hand door.
key back in its casing in the card. unlock the doors by pressing switch 5.
The front door mechanism cannot be
locked if the door is open.

1.13
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS AND TAILGATE (3/3)
Door and tailgate status Locking the opening
indicator elements without the card or
(depending on vehicle) the key
When the ignition is on, the indicator For example, in the event of a dis-
above switch 5 comes on and informs charged battery or the card or key tem-
you of the status of the doors and tail- porarily not working etc.
gate:
With the engine switched off and a
– indicator light on, the doors and tail- door or tailgate open, press and hold
gate are locked; the 5 switch for more than five seconds.
– indicator light off, the doors and tail- When the door is closed, all the doors
gate are unlocked. and the tailgate will be locked.
When you lock the doors, the indicator Unlocking the vehicle from the outside
light remains lit and then goes out. is only possible with the card in the ve-
hicle access zone or by using the key.

Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those as- Never leave your vehicle
sisting you to gain access to the with the key or card inside.
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.

1.14
AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING
Activating/deactivating the Operating faults
function If you notice an operating fault (auto-
To activate: with the vehicle at a matic locking impossible), first check
standstill and the engine running, press that all doors are correctly locked. If
the switch 1 until a beep sounds. they are correctly locked and the fault
is still present, contact an approved
To deactivate: with the vehicle at a Dealer.
standstill and the engine running, press
the switch 1 until a beep sounds. Also make sure that locking has not
1 been inadvertently deactivated.
If this is the case, reactivate it.

Operating principle
After the vehicle is started, the system
automatically locks the doors once your
speed reaches approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h).
Note: if a door is opened or closed, it
will automatically lock again when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 4 mph
(7 km/h). Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those as-
sisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.

1.15
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/2)

2
1

Opening from the outside Opening from the inside Child safety
With the doors unlocked (refer to the Pull handle 2. To make it impossible for the rear doors
information on “Locking/unlocking the to be opened from the inside, move
doors” in Section 1), place your hand lever 3 on each door and check from
below the handle 1 and pull towards the inside that the doors are securely
you. locked.

As a safety precaution,
the doors should only be
opened or closed when the
vehicle is stationary.

1.16
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/2)
Lights-on reminder buzzer Driver’s responsibility
If you have left the lights on after switch- when parking or stopping
ing off the ignition, a warning buzzer will the vehicle
sound when a front door is opened (to
Never leave an animal,
prevent the battery from discharging,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
etc.).
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
Door/tailgate open buzzer They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
Depending on the vehicle, this alarm is
activating equipment such as the
fitted to the driver’s side door or on all
electric windows or by locking the
opening elements.
doors.
With the vehicle at a standstill, a warn- Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ing light 2
will come on if a door or the
boot is open or not properly closed.
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
While driving, as soon as the vehicle RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), a warning INJURY.
light 2 comes on with an audio beep.

Special note
Depending on the vehicle, accessories
(e.g. radio) stop working either when
the engine is switched off or when the
driver’s door is opened or when the
doors are locked.

1.17
FRONT HEADRESTS

A A
3 1 3

To raise the headrest To refit the headrest

Pull the headrest upwards to the de- Check that the headrest rods are
sired height. Check that it is correctly clean 3.
locked. Insert the headrest rods into the holes 1
To lower the headrest (tilt the seatback backwards if neces-
sary). Lower the headrest until it locks
Press button 2 and guide the headrest and press button 2 to adjust to the de-
down to the desired height. Check that sired height. Check that each rod 3 on
the bonnet is correctly locked. the seatback is securely locked. The headrest is important
for safety. Ensure that it is in
To remove the headrest
place and in the correct po-
Raise it to its highest position (tilt the sition: the top of the head-
seatback backwards if necessary). rest should be as close as possible
Press button 2 and lift the headrest to to the top of the head and there must
release it. be a minimal distance between the
head and the headrest A.

1.18
FRONT SEATS (1/3)

5
1 2 3

Settings To tilt the seatback

For safety reasons, carry
Lift handle 3 and tilt the seatback to the out any adjustments when
To move the seat forwards or back desired position. Release the handle at the vehicle is not being
Lift and hold the lever 1 to unlock the the desired position and make sure that driven.
seat. When the seat is in the required it is locked.
We would advise you not to recline
position, release the lever and ensure
Lumbar adjustment the seatbacks too far to ensure that
that the seat is locked in place.
the effectiveness of the seat belts is
Turn the knob 4 or the handle 5 (de- not reduced.
To raise or lower the seat base pending on the vehicle) to increase or
Raise or lower the handle 2 as many reduce the support. Make sure that the seatbacks are
times as necessary until the desired po- correctly locked in place.
sition is reached. Nothing should be placed on the
floor (area in front of driver) as such
objects may slide under the pedal
After making adjustments, during braking manoeuvres, thus
make sure that the seat- obstructing its use.
backs are correctly locked
in place.

1.19
FRONT SEATS (2/3)

6
8
7

Front armrest 6 or 7 Central armrest 8

(depending on vehicle) (depending on the vehicle)
To adjust the position of the armrest,
slide it forwards or backwards until it
reaches the stop.

1.20
FRONT SEATS (3/3)

10
Heated seats Depending on the vehicle, with the ig-
nition on:
Depending on the vehicle, with the igni-
tion on, press switch 9. – pressing the switch 10 on the re-
quired seat for the first time activates
To exit this function, press switch 9 the heating system at maximum
again. power. Both integrated switch warn-
The system, which has a thermostat, ing lights come on;
decides whether or not the heating is – a second press decreases the heat-
needed. ing to minimum power. One inte-
grated warning light comes on;
– pressing for the third time turns the
heating off.
The system automatically regulates the
seat temperature. When activated, it
will determine if the seat heating is nec-
essary or not.

1.21
SEAT BELTS (1/6)
Always wear your seat belt when trav- Adjusting your driving
elling in your vehicle. You must also position
comply with the legislation of the par- (depending on the vehicle)
ticular country you are in.
– Sit well back in your seat (having
Before starting, adjust your driving removed your coat or jacket, etc.).
position and then have each occu- This is essential to ensure your back
pant adjust their seat belt to ensure is positioned correctly;
optimum protection.
– adjust the distance between the
seat and the pedals. Your seat
should be as far back as possible
while still allowing you to fully de- Make sure that the rear bench seat
press the pedals. The seatback is locked in position correctly so that
should be adjusted so that your arms the rear seat belts will operate cor-
are slightly bent when you hold the rectly. Refer to “Rear bench seat:
steering wheel; functions” in Section 3.
– adjust the position of your head-
rest. For maximum safety, your head
must be as close as possible to the
headrest; Incorrectly adjusted or
twisted seat belts may
– adjust the height of the seat. This cause injuries in the event
adjustment allows you to select the of an accident.
seat position which offers you the Use one seat belt per person,
best possible view; whether child or adult.
– adjust the position of the steering Even pregnant women should wear
wheel. a seat belt. In this case, ensure that
the lap belt is not exerting too much
pressure on the abdomen, but do
not allow any slack.

1.22
SEAT BELTS (2/6)
To fasten
Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly A
and ensure that buckle 3 locks into
catch 5 (check that it is locked by pull-
ing on buckle 3).
If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly
1 before attempting to unwind it again.
If your seat belt is completely jammed,
pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over
3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly
3 4 before attempting to unwind it again.
5
2 5 If there is still a problem, contact an ap-
proved dealer.

Unlocking
Adjusting the seat belts ß Driver’s seat belt reminder
Press button 4 and the seat belt will be and, depending on the vehi-
Sit with your back firmly against the rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the cle, front passenger seat belt reminder
seatback. belt. This appears on the central display A
Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as when the ignition is switched on and
possible to the base of the neck but not if the driver’s and/or front passenger’s
on it. seat belt(s) (if the passenger seat is oc-
cupied) is not fastened.
Lap belt 2 must be worn flat over the Depending on the vehicle, if the seat is
thighs and against the pelvis. e.g.: avoid occupied and one of these seat belts is
wearing heavy clothing or keeping not fastened or becomes unfastened
bulky objects under the belts, etc. while the vehicle is moving at a speed
over approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),
the ß warning light flashes and a
beep sounds for approximately
120 seconds.
Note: An object placed on the passen-
ger seat may activate the warning light
in some cases, depending on the ve-
hicle.
1.23
SEAT BELTS (3/6)
Understanding the graphic 6: Always make sure that the rear passen-
– white symbol: seatbelt fastened; gers are properly fastened in and that
the number of seat belts indicated cor-
– black symbol: seatbelt unfastened. responds to the number of rear seats
When the vehicle speed is below ap- occupied.
proximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the 6
symbol appears for approximately
6 60 seconds every time one of the rear
seat belts is fastened or unfastened.
When the vehicle speed reaches or ex-
ceeds 12 mph (20 km/h), if one of the
rear seat belts is unfastened during the
journey:

Rear seat belt reminder

– the ß warning light flashes on
the central display;
(depending on the vehicle) and
The 6 graphic is displayed on the in- – a beep sounds for around 30 sec-
strument panel when the ignition is onds;
switched on.
and
This informs the driver of the fasten- – the 6 symbol is displayed for at least
ing status of each of the rear seat belts 60 seconds and the symbol for the
every time: seat concerned changes to black.
– the ignition is switched on;
– a door is opened;
– a rear seat belt is fasted or unfas-
tened. Make sure that the rear bench seat
is locked in position correctly so that
the rear seat belts will operate cor-
rectly. Refer to “Rear bench seat:
functions” in Section 3.

1.24
SEAT BELTS (4/6)
When the vehicle speed is below ap-
proximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the 7
7 symbol and the “Rear belts” message
appear on the display for approximately
60 seconds every time one of the rear
seat belts is fastened or unfastened.
When the vehicle speed reaches or ex-
ceeds 12 mph (20 km/h), if one of the 8
rear seat belts is unfastened during the
journey:
10
– the ß warning light flashes on
the central display; 9
and
– a beep sounds for around 30 sec-
onds;
Rear seat belt reminder and Five-seater version
(continued) – the 7 symbol is displayed for at least
The 7 symbol and the “Rear belts” mes- 60 seconds and the symbol for the Rear side seat belts
sage are displayed on the instrument seat concerned changes to “0”. Slowly unwind belt 8 and click buckle 9
panel when the ignition is switched on. Always make sure that the rear passen- into red catch 10.
This informs the driver of the fasten- gers are properly fastened in and that
ing status of each of the rear seat belts the number of seat belts indicated cor-
every time: responds to the number of rear seats
– the ignition is switched on; occupied.
– a door is opened;
– a rear seat belt is fasted or unfas-
tened.
Understanding the graphic 7:
– “star” symbol: seat belt fastened;
– “0” symbol: seat belt unfastened.

1.25
SEAT BELTS (5/6)
B B
C

13
13
11
14
12 15

11 15
16
Rear centre seat belt B Four-seater version
(depending on vehicle)
This version differs in that it has rear
Remove the buckle 15 from its hous- seatbelts and headrests on the rear
ing 16. side seats only.
Slowly unwind belt 13 and click Make sure that the rear bench seat The C label informs you that it is pro-
buckle 15 into the black catch 14. is locked in position correctly so that hibited to seat passengers in areas
Fasten sliding buckle 11 into red the rear seat belts will operate cor- other than the seats provided.
catch 12. rectly. Refer to “Rear bench seat:
functions” in Section 3.
Insert buckle 15 into housing 16 when-
ever the seat belt is not in use.

Check that the rear seat

belts are positioned and op-
erating correctly each time
the rear seats are moved.

1.26
SEAT BELTS (6/6)
The following information applies to the vehicle’s front and rear seat belts.

– No modification may be made to the component parts of the restraint system – belts and seats and their mountings
– fitted originally. For special operations (e.g.: fitting child seats) contact an approved Dealer.
– Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes pegs, clips, etc.) as a seat belt which is worn too
loosely may cause injury in the event of an accident.
– Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.
– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your lap with your seat belt around
them.
– The belt should never be twisted.
– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary. Always replace your seat belts as soon as
they show any signs of wear.
– Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.
– When the rear bench seat is being put back, make sure that the seat belts and buckles are correctly positioned so that they
can be used properly.
– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as they could prevent it from being properly se-
cured.
– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden away, crushed or flattened by people or ob-
jects).

1.27
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/5)
Depending on the vehicle, they are
composed of: – Have the entire restraint
system checked following
– front seat belt inertia reel preten- an accident.
sioners;
– No operation whatso-
– chest force limiters; ever is permitted on any part
– airbags driver and passenger of the system (pretensioners,
front. airbags, computers, wiring) and
the system components must not
These systems are designed to act in- be reused on any other vehicle,
dependently or together when the vehi- even if identical.
cle is subjected to a frontal impact.
– Only qualified personnel from our
Depending on the severity of the Network may work on the airbags;
impact, the system can trigger: otherwise the system may trigger
– seat belt locking; 1 accidentally and cause injury.
– the seat belt pretensioner to hold the Pretensioners – The electric trigger system may
occupant in the seat, and the force The pretensioners hold the seat belt only be tested by a specially
limiter; against the body, holding the occupant trained technician using special
more securely against the seat, thus in- equipment.
– the front airbag.
creasing the seat belt’s efficiency. – When the vehicle is scrapped,
With the ignition on, following a signif- contact an approved dealer for
icant frontal impact and depending on disposal of the pretensioner and
the severity of the impact, the system airbags gas generators.
may trigger the seat belt inertia reel
pretensioner 1, which instantly retracts
the seat belt.

Load limiter
Above a certain level of impact force,
this mechanism is used to limit the force
of the belt against the body so that it is
at an acceptable level.

1.28
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/5)
driver and passenger front
Airbags
These are provided for the driver and
the front passenger seats (location A).
The presence of this equipment is indi-
cated by the word “airbag” on the steer- A
ing wheel, dashboard (in the area of the
airbag A) and, depending on the vehi-
cle, a label on the lower section of the
windscreen.
Each airbag system consists of:
– an airbag and gas generator fitted on
the steering wheel for the driver and
in the dashboard for the passenger;
Operation
– an electronic unit for system monitor-
ing which controls the gas generator This system is only operational when
electrical trigger system; the ignition is switched on.
In a severe frontal impact, the airbags
– a special warning light å ; inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact of
– remote sensors. The airbag system uses py- the driver's head and chest against the
rotechnic principles. This steering wheel and of the front passen-
explains why, when the ger against the dashboard. They then
airbag inflates, it will gener- deflate immediately so that the passen-
ate heat, produce smoke (this does gers are not in any way hindered when
not mean that a fire is about to start) leaving the vehicle.
and make a banging noise. In a situ-
ation where an airbag is required, it
will inflate immediately and this may
cause some minor, superficial graz-
ing to the skin or other problems.

1.29
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/5)

The following cases trigger the pre- In a frontal impact with another vehi- In a side impact with another vehicle
tensioners or airbags: cle of an equivalent or higher category, of an equivalent or higher category, at
In a frontal impact against a rigid with an impact area equal to or greater an impact speed equal to or greater
(non-deformable) surface at an impact than 40%, where the speed of both ve- than 31 mph (50 km/h).
speed equal to or greater than 16 mph hicles is equal to or greater than 25 mph
(25 km/h). (40 km/h).

1.30
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/5)

In the following examples, the pre- In the following examples, the pre- – side impact to the front or rear of the
tensioners and airbags could oper- tensioners and airbags might not vehicle;
ate: operate: – frontal impact, under the tail of a
– impacts to the underside of the vehi- – rear impact, however severe; lorry;
cle, from kerbs, for example; – the vehicle overturning; – frontal impact against an obstacle
– potholes; with a sharp angle;
– a fall or a hard landing; – ...
– stones;
– ...

1.31
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (5/5)
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.

Warnings concerning the driver’s airbag

– Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.
– Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.
– Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.
– You must not remove the steering wheel (such work must only be performed by trained personnel from our Network).
– Do not sit too close to the steering wheel when driving: sit with your arms slightly bent (see “Adjusting your driving position”
in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the airbag to deploy correctly and be fully effective.

Warnings concerning the passenger airbag

– Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the airbag.
– Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).
– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may occur. In
general, all parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head etc.).
– Reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as you remove the child seat to ensure the protection of the front passenger in the
event of an impact.

A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS IN ADDITION TO THE SEAT BELT, I.E. AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.
(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1)

1.32
SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES
Side Airbags
These airbags may be fitted to the front
seats and are deployed at the sides of
the seats (door side) to protect the oc-
cupants in the event of a severe side
impact.

Curtain Airbags
These are airbag fitted along the sides
of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger
along the front and rear door side win-
dows to protect the passengers in case Warning relating to the side airbag
of a severe side impact. – Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an airbag require covers spe-
cifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved dealer to find out
if such covers are available from our Network. The use of any covers
other than those designed for your vehicle (including those designed for an-
other vehicle) may affect the operation of the airbags and reduce your protec-
tion.
– In the front, do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the
seatback, the door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with ob-
jects such as clothes or accessories. This may prevent the airbag from operat-
ing correctly or cause injury when the airbag is deployed.
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal
fittings, except by qualified personnel from our Network.

Depending on the vehicle, a mark-

ing on the windscreen informs you
of the presence of additional means
of restraint (airbags, pretensioners
etc.) in the passenger compartment.

1.33
ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.

The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both
Operating faults
the airbag and the seat belt are integral parts of the same protection
system. It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts This warning lightå will light up on
the instrument panel when the ignition
are not worn, the occupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in
the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries is switched on and then go out after a
occurring when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always few seconds.
possible with airbags. If it does not light up when the ignition
If the vehicle should overturn or suffer a rear impact, however severe, the preten- is switched on or if it comes on when
sioners and airbags are not always triggered. Shocks to the underbody of the ve- the engine is running, accompanied
hicle, from pavements, potholes, stones etc. can all trigger these systems. by the warning light © and, de-
pending on the vehicle, the message
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the “WARNING: Check Airbag”, there
driver or passenger airbag system (airbag, computer, wiring harness etc.), is a system fault. In this case, it is
except by qualified network personnel. PROHIBITED to fit a child seat on the
– To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental trig- front passenger seat.
gering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified Network personnel Contact an approved dealer as soon
may work on the airbag system. as possible. Your protection will be re-
– As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has duced until this fault is rectified.
been involved in an accident, or is stolen or broken into.
– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand
over this driver’s handbook with the vehicle.
– When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved Dealer for disposal of the
gas generator(s).

1.34
CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)
Carrying children
Please ensure that you comply with the Special features of LPG
legislation of your country. versions
Children, and adults, must be correctly The vehicle’s LPG installa-
seated and strapped in for all journeys. tion may lead to changes to
The children being carried in your vehi- the vehicle’s features compared to
cle are your responsibility. the petrol version.
A child is not a miniature adult. Children This may relate to the number of Driver’s responsibility
are at risk of specific injuries as their seats and the installation of child when parking or stopping
muscles and bones have not yet fin- seats. the vehicle
ished growing. The seat belt alone Please contact an authorised dealer. Never leave an animal,
would not provide suitable protection. child or adult who is not self-suffi-
Use an approved child seat and ensure cient alone on your vehicle, even for
you use it correctly. a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
A collision at 30 mph activating equipment such as the
(50 km/h) is the same as fall- electric windows or by locking the
ing a distance of 10 metres. doors.
Transporting a child without Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
a restraint is the equivalent of allow- please remember that the tempera-
ing him or her to play on a fourth- ture inside the passenger compart-
floor balcony without railings. ment increases very quickly.
Never travel with a child held in your
arms. In the event of an accident, RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
To prevent the doors being INJURY.
you will not be able to keep hold of
opened, use the childproof
the child, even if you yourself are
locks (refer to the informa-
wearing a seat belt.
tion on “Locking/unlocking
If your vehicle has been involved in
the opening elements” in Section 1).
a road accident, replace the child
seat and have the seat belts and
ISOFIX anchorage points checked.

1.35
CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)
Using a child seat Before fitting a child seat, read the
manual and respect its instructions. If
The level of protection offered by the you experience any difficulties during
child seat depends on its ability to re- installation, contact the manufacturer
strain your child and on its installation. of the equipment. Keep the instructions
Incorrect installation compromises the with the seat.
protection it offers the child in the event
of harsh braking or an impact.
Before purchasing a child seat, check
that it complies with the regulations for
the country you are in and that it can
be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an ap-
proved dealer to find out which seats
are recommended for your vehicle.
The regulations on transporting chil-
dren are specific to each country. Never leave a child unat-
tended in the vehicle.
The use of a child seat during transport
depends on the age and/or the size Check that your child is
and/or weight of the child. always strapped in and that
the belt or safety harness used is
For children who do not need to be correctly set and adjusted. Avoid
transported to a child seat, make sure Set a good example by always fas- wearing bulky clothing which could
that the seat belt is correctly adjusted tening your seat belt and teaching cause the belts to slacken.
and fastened. your child:
– to strap themselves in correctly; Never let your child put their head or
In all cases, you must comply with the arms out of the window.
regulations of the particular country you – to always get in and out of the car
are in. at the kerb, away from busy traf- Check that the child is in the correct
fic. position for the entire journey, espe-
Do not use a second-hand child cially if asleep.
seat or one without an instruction
manual.
Check that there are no objects in
the vicinity of the child seat which
could impede its operation.

1.36
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat

Rear-facing child seats Forward-facing child seats Booster cushions

A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier Up to 18 kg or 4 years, the child may From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can
than that of an adult and its neck is very travel on a forward-facing seat. Choose travel using a booster seat, which will
fragile. Transport the child in this po- a seat according to the size of the child: enable the seat belt to be adapted
sition for as long as possible (until the the head and abdomen, etc. to suit his/her size and shape. The
age of 2 at the very least). It supports The child’s head and abdomen need to booster seat cushion must be fitted with
the head and neck. Choose a bucket be protected as a priority. A forward-fac- guides to position the seat belt on the
type seat for better side protection and ing child seat which is firmly attached to child’s thighs rather than the stomach.
replace it as soon as the child’s head the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact It is recommended that you use a seat-
extends past the seat shell. to the head. Ensure your child travels in back fitted with a belt strap guide which
a forward-facing seat with a harness for can be adjusted in terms of height to
as long as their size permits. Choose a position the seat belt in the centre of
bucket type seat for optimum side pro- the shoulder. It should never rest on the
tection. neck or over the arm. Choose a bucket
type seat for better side protection.

1.37
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/3)
There are two ways of attaching child Attachment via the seat belt
seats: via the seat belt or using the The seat belt must be adjusted to
ISOFIX system. ensure that it is effective in the event of
harsh braking or an impact.
Ensure that the strap paths indicated
by the child seat manufacturer are re-
spected.
Always check that the seat belt is cor-
rectly fastened by pulling it up, then
pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the
child seat.
Check that the seat is correctly held by
moving it from side to side and back
to front: the seat should remain firmly
fixed.
Check that the child seat has not been
installed at an angle and that it is not The seat belt must never
resting against a window. be twisted or the tension
relieved. Never pass the
shoulder strap under the
arm or behind the back.
Check that the seat belt has not
been damaged by sharp edges.
If the seat belt does not operate nor-
mally, it will not protect the child.
Do not use the child seat
Consult an approved dealer. Do not
if it may unfasten the seat
use this seat until the seat belt has
belt restraining it: the base
been repaired.
of the seat must not rest on
the buckle and/or catch of the seat
belt.

1.38
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/3)
Attachment using the ISOFIX Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX
system locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX
Approved child seats ISOFIX are stand- system allows quick, easy, safe fitting. 1
ardised in accordance with current reg- The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings
ulations if any of the four cases below and, in some cases, a third ring.
applies:
– ISOFIX universal 3-point forward-
facing seat;
– ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat;
– Specific; No modifications may be
– i-Size Which has: made to the component
– either a belt which attaches to the parts of the restraint system
third ring of the seat concerned; (ISOFIX seat belts, seats
– or a strut that rests on the vehi- and their mountings) originally fitted.
cle floor, compatible with the ap- The two rings 1 are located between
proved seat i-Size, the role of the seatback and the seat base of the
which is to prevent the child seat seat and are identified by a marking.
from moving in the event of a col-
lision.
In the latter three cases check that your
child seat can be installed by consulting Before using an ISOFIX
the list of compatible vehicles. child seat that you pur-
chased for another vehicle,
check that its installation is
authorised. Consult the list of ve-
hicles which can be fitted with the
seat from the equipment manufac-
turer.

1.39
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (3/3)
Note: it is essential to use the rings
marked with the symbol ± .

3
2

The third ring of each side seat is used Attach the hook on the belt to one of the
to attach the upper strap on some child rings 2 (version 4x2) or 3 (version 4x4).
seats. Check that the seatback
Pull the belt so that the back of the child of the forward-facing child
Pass the belt between the seatback seat comes into contact with the back seat is in contact with the
and the rear parcel shelf (to remove the of the vehicle seat. seatback of the vehicle
parcel shelf: refer to Section 3 “Parcel seat. In this case, the child seat may
shelf”). not always rest on the seat base of
the vehicle seat.

The ISOFIX anchorage points have been exclusively designed for child
seats with the ISOFIX system. Never fit a different type of child seat, seat
belt or other objects to these anchorage points.
Check that nothing is obstructing the anchorage points.
The child seat strap must
If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, have the ISOFIX anchorage be attached to the corre-
points checked and replace your child seat. sponding ring.

1.40
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (1/2)
Some seats are not suitable for fitting The types of child seat indicated may After installing the child seat, push the
child seats. The diagram on the follow- not be available. Before using a differ- front passenger seat at least one notch.
ing page shows you how to attach a ent child seat, check with the manufac- In the case of a rear-facing child seat,
child seat. turer that it can be fitted. do not let it touch the dashboard.

In the front seat Do not change other settings after in-

stalling the child seat.
The laws concerning children travel-
ling in the front passenger seat differ in
Fit the child seat in a rear every country. Consult the legislation in
seat wherever possible. force and follow the indications on the
Make sure that the child diagram on the following page.
seat or the child’s feet do Before installing a child seat on this
not prevent the front seat from lock- seat (if authorised and depending on
ing correctly. Refer to the informa- the vehicle):
tion on the “Front seat” in Section 1. – lower the seat belt as far as possible;
Check that when installing the child – move the seat as far back as possi-
seat in the vehicle it is not at risk of ble;
coming loose from its base. – gently tilt the seatback away from
vertical (approximately 25°);
If you have to remove the headrest, – raise the seat base fully.
check that it is correctly stored so
that it does not come loose under In all situations, reinsert the headrest to
harsh braking or impact. its full extent so that it does not interfere
with the child seat (see the information
Always attach the child seat to the RISK OF DEATH OR
on “Front headrests” in Section 1);
vehicle even if it is not in use so that SERIOUS INJURY: before
it does not come loose under harsh fitting a rear-facing child
braking or impact. seat to this seat, check
that the airbag has been deacti-
vated (refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activat-
ing the front passenger airbag” in
Section 1).

1.41
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (2/2)
In the rear side seat
A carrycot can be installed across the
A child seat with floor sup-
vehicle and will take up at least two
ports must never be ins-
seats. Position the child with his or her
talled on the rear centre
feet nearest the door.
seat. RISK OF DEATH OR
Before installing a child seat in the SERIOUS INJURY.
ISOFIX anchoring points on a rear side
seat, check that the seat belt buckles
are not placed between the two ISOFIX
anchorage points in this seat. If neces-
sary, move the buckle from the seat in
question towards the centre of the ve-
hicle. When fitting a child seat
(Group 2 or 3 booster seat),
Move the front seat as far forward as
check that the seat belts op-
possible to install a rear-facing child
erate (wind) correctly: refer
seat, then move back the seat in front
to Section 1 “Rear seat belts”. If
as far as it will go, although without al-
necessary, adjust the position of the
lowing it to come into contact with the
vehicle seat.
child seat.
For the safety of a child in the facing
forwards, move the seat as far back as
possible and move the seat in front of
the child forward, remembering to move
the seatback forwards to avoid contact
between the seat and the child’s legs. Ensure that the child seat
Always remove the headrest from the or the child’s feet do not
rear seat used for the child seat (see prevent the front seat from
“Rear headrests” in Section 3). locking correctly. Refer to
Check that the child seat is resting the information on the “Front seat”
against the back of the vehicle seat. in Section 1 or “Rear seat operation”
in Section 3.

1.42
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (1/4)
Visual installation of the five-seater version

Seat not suitable for fitting

² child seats.
Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached
by a seat belt.
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.

1.43
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (2/4)
Visual installation of four-seater version

Seat not suitable for fitting

² child seats.
Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached
by a seat belt.
Using a child safety system Carrying a passenger is
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
 STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.

1.44
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (3/4)
The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous pages, to ensure the regula-
tions in force are respected.

Front passenger Front passenger Rear centre

seat without airbag seat with Rear side seat, five-
Type of child seat Weight of the child
or with airbag airbag without seats seater version
deactivated deactivation ONLY

Carrycot fitted
across the vehicle < 10 kg X X U (1) X
Group 0

Rear-facing shell
seat < 10 kg and < 13 kg X X U (2) U (2)
Groups 0 or 0 +

Shell seat/rear-fac-
ing seat < 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg X X U (2) U (2)
Groups 0+ and 1

Forward-facing
seat 9 to 18 kg X X U (3) U (3)
Group 1

Booster seat 15 to 25 kg and 22 to

X X U (3) U (3)
Groups 2 and 3 36 kg

1.45
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (4/4)
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(1) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest
the door.
(2) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-
facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(3) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.

1.46
CHILD SEATS: fitted using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (1/4)
To ensure you comply with the applicable regulations, the table below summarises the information shown in the diagram
on the following pages.

Rear centre seat

Weight of Seat size ISOFIX Front passenger
Type of child seat Rear side seats Five-seater
the child [Gabarit] seat
version ONLY

Carrycot fitted across F, G

the vehicle < 10 kg X X X
Group 0 [L1,L2]

Rear-facing shell seat E

< 13 kg X IL (1) X
Groups 0 or 0 + [R1]

Rear-facing seat < 13 kg and 9 to C, D

X IL (1) X
Groups 0+ and 1 18 kg [R3,R2]

Forward-facing seat A, B, B1
9 to 18 kg X IUF - IL (2) X
Group 1 [F3,F2,F2X]

Booster seat 15 to 25 kg and

[B2] X IUF - IL (2) X
Groups 2 and 3 22 to 36 kg

Seat i-Size X i-U X

1.47
CHILD SEATS: fitted using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (2/4)
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.
IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at-
tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.
i-U = Suitable for the i-Size restraint devices in the “universal” forward-facing and backward-facing category.
(1) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-
facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(2) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:
– A, B and B1 [F3, F2, F2X]: for forward-facing seats in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– CandD [R3,R2]: rear-facing seats or shell seats in Group 0+ (less than 13 kg) or Group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– E [R1] rear-facing shell seats in group 0 (less than 10 kg) or group 0+ (less than 13 kg);
– F and G [L1, L2]: for carrycots in group 0 (under 10 kg);
– [B2]: for booster seats in groups 2 and 3 (15 to 25 kg and 22 to 36 kg).

1.48
CHILD SEATS: fitted using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (3/4)
Visual installation of the five-seater version Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX
mounting
 Seat which allows an ISOFIX
child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a for-
ward-facing ISOFIX child seat with uni-
versal approval to be attached.

Seat which does not allow a

² child seat to be fitted.

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.

1.49
CHILD SEATS: fitted using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (4/4)
Visual installation of four-seater version Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX
mounting
 Seat which allows an ISOFIX
child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a for-
ward-facing ISOFIX child seat with uni-
versal approval to be attached.

Seat which does not allow a

² child seat to be fitted.
Carrying a passenger is
 STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.

1.50
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating AIRBAG front passenger (1/3)
DANGER
Since operation of the front
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the position
of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER fit
2 a rear-facing child restraint system in
a seat protected by an ACTIVATED
front AIRBAG. This can lead to the
DEATH of the CHILD or SERIOUS
INJURY.
1

Front passengerairbag To deactivate the airbag: with the

deactivation vehicle stationary and the ignition
(depending on vehicle) switched off, push and turn lock 1 to
the OFF position. the passenger airbag must
Before installing a child seat on the
front passenger seat: When the ignition is switched on, it is be activated or deactivated
essential to check that the warning only while the vehicle is
– check that the child seat can be in- stationary and the ignition
stalled on this seat; light]
play 2.
is illuminated on the dis- is off.
– it is essential to deactivate the If it is interfered with when the ve-
airbag for a rear-facing child seat. This warning light remains continu- hicle is being driven, indicator lights
ously lit to let you know that you can
fit a child seat. å and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the airbag in accordance
with the lock position.

1.51
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating AIRBAG front passenger (2/3)

A B
A

The markings on the dashboard and

the labels A or B (depending on the
vehicle) on each side of the passen-
DANGER ger sun visor 3 (see example of labels
above) provide a reminder of these in-
Since operation of the front
structions.
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the position
of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER fit
a rear-facing child restraint system in
a seat protected by an ACTIVATED
front AIRBAG. This can lead to the
DEATH of the CHILD or SERIOUS
INJURY.

1.52
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating AIRBAG front passenger (3/3)

Front passengerairbag Operating faults

activation It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child
(depending on vehicle) seat to the front passenger seat if the
You should reactivate the airbag as airbag activation/deactivation system is the passenger airbag must
soon as you remove the child seat from faulty. be activated or deactivated
the front passenger seat to ensure the only while the vehicle is
Allowing any other passenger to sit in stationary and the ignition
protection of the front passenger in the that seat is not recommended.
event of an impact. is off.
Contact your approved dealer as soon If it is interfered with when the ve-
To reactivate the airbag: with the as possible.
vehicle stationary and the ignition hicle is being driven, indicator lights
switched off, press and turn the lock 1
to the ON position.
å and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
When the ignition is switched on, you to reset the airbag in accordance
must check that the warning light with the lock position.
] is switched off on the display 2.

1.53
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (1/12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 21 20 19

28 27 26 25 24 23 22

1.54
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (2/12)
The fittings described DEPEND ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Side air vent. 10 Centre air vents. 20 Main switch for:

– activation/deactivation of ESC
2 Side demister outlet. 11 Central demister outlet. version 4x4 (4WD),
3 Tweeter. 12 Location for radio, navigation system – activating/deactivating the system
or storage compartments. camera in multiple view,
4 Stalk: – activation/deactivation of the
– direction indicator lights, 13 Dashboard upper storage compart- parking distance control,
ment.
– exterior lights, – activation/deactivation of central
14 Passenger airbag location. door locking,
– front fog lights,
– activation/deactivation of the
– rear fog light. 15 Tweeter. hazard warning lights,
5 Horn. 16 Side demister outlet. – activation/deactivation of ECO,
mode;
6 Instrument panel. 17 Side air vent. – activating/deactivating the Stop
and Start function,
7 Driver airbag location. 18 Passenger airbag activation/deacti-
– activation/deactivation of the hill
vation switch.
8 Steering column stalk for windscreen descent control function.
and rear screen wash/wiper. 19 Glove compartment.
9 Start button.

1.55
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (3/12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 21 20 19

28 27 26 25 24 23 22

1.56
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (4/12)
The fittings described DEPEND ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

21 Heating or air conditioning controls. 29 Radio remote control.

22 Cigarette lighter or accessories 30 Control:

socket. – trip computer and warning system
information readout,
23 Bottle holders.
– multimedia system voice control.
24 Handbrake.
31 Beam height adjustment control.
25 Main switch for:
32 Function settings controls:
– speed limiter,
– speed limiter,
– cruise control.
– cruise control.
26 4x2 (2WD) and 4x4 (4WD) mode
selector. 33 Fuse box.

27 Gearstick. 34 Bonnet release control.

28 Multimedia sockets. 35 Activation/deactivation of the blind

spot warning function.

36 LPG control.

1.57
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (5/12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 21 20 19

27 26 25 24 23 22

1.58
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (6/12)
The fittings described DEPEND ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Side air vent. 10 Centre air vents. 20 Main switch for:

– activation/deactivation of ESC
2 Side demister outlet. 11 Central demister outlet. version 4x4 (4WD),
3 Tweeter. 12 Location for radio, navigation system – activating/deactivating the system
or storage compartments. camera in multiple view,
4 Stalk: – activation/deactivation of the
– direction indicator lights, 13 Dashboard upper storage compart- parking distance control,
ment.
– exterior lights, – activation/deactivation of central
14 Passenger airbag location. door locking,
– front fog lights,
– activation/deactivation of the
– rear fog light. 15 Tweeter. hazard warning lights,
5 Horn. 16 Side demister outlet. – activation/deactivation of ECO,
mode;
6 Instrument panel. 17 Side air vent. – activating/deactivating the Stop
and Start function,
7 Driver airbag location. 18 Passenger airbag activation/deacti-
– activation/deactivation of the hill
vation switch.
8 Steering column stalk for windscreen descent control function.
and rear screen wash/wiper. 19 Glove compartment.
9 Start button.

1.59
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (7/12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 21 20 19

27 26 25 24 23 22

1.60
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (8/12)
The fittings described DEPEND ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

21 Heating or air conditioning controls. 28 Radio remote control. 32 Fuse box.

22 Cigarette lighter or accessories 29 Control: 33 Bonnet release control.

socket. – trip computer and warning system
information readout, 34 LPG control
23 Bottle holders.
– multimedia system voice control. 35 Activation/deactivation of the blind
24 Handbrake. spot warning function.
30 Beam height adjustment control.
25 Main switch for: 36 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment
31 Function settings controls: control.
– speed limiter,
– speed limiter,
– cruise control.
– cruise control.
26 4x2 (2WD) and 4x4 (4WD) mode
selector.

27 Gearstick.

1.61
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (9/12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 20 19 18

26 25 24 23 22 21

1.62
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (10/12)
The fittings described DEPEND ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Side air vent. 9 Centre air vents. 19 Main switch for:

– activation/deactivation of the
2 Side demister outlet. 10 Central demister outlet. heated front seats,
3 Tweeter. 11 Location for radio, navigation system – activation/deactivation of ECO
or storage compartments. mode,
4 Stalk: – activation/deactivation of the
– direction indicator lights, 12 Dashboard upper storage compart- hazard warning lights,
ment.
– exterior lights, – activation/deactivation of central
13 Passenger airbag location. door locking,
– front fog lights,
– activation/deactivation of the
– rear fog light. 14 Tweeter. parking distance control,
5 Horn. 15 Side demister outlet. – activating/deactivating the mul-
ti-view camera system.
6 Instrument panel. 16 Side air vent.
7 Driver airbag location. 17 Passenger airbag activation or de-
activation switch.
8 Steering column stalk for windscreen
and rear screen wash/wiper. 18 Glove compartment

1.63
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (11/12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 20 19 18

26 25 24 23 22 21

1.64
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (12/12)
The fittings described DEPEND ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

20 Heating or air conditioning controls. 30 Beam height adjustment control.

21 Cigarette lighter or accessories 31 Cruise control/speed limiter controls

socket. and main switch.

22 Multimedia sockets. 32 Fuse box.

23 Handbrake. 33 Bonnet release control.

24 Bottle holders. 34 Switch:

– activation/deactivation of the Hill
25 4x2 (2WD) and 4x4 (4WD) mode Descent Control function,
selector.
– activation/deactivation of ESC,
26 Gearstick. – activation/deactivation of the
steering wheel heating,
27 Ignition switch.
– activation/deactivation of the
28 Radio remote control. electric heated windscreen function.

29 Control: 35 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment

control.
– trip computer and warning system
information readout,
– multimedia system voice control.

1.65
DRIVING POSITION, RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (1/4)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

37 36 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19

35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

1.66
DRIVING POSITION, RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (2/4)
The presence of the equipment DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Side air vent. 10 Stalk: 19 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment

– direction indicator lights, control.
2 Side demister outlet.
– exterior lights, 20 LPG control
3 Tweeter. – front fog lights,
21 Activation/deactivation of the blind
4 Dashboard upper storage compart- – rear fog light. spot warning function.
ment.
11 Driver airbag location. 22 Control:
5 Passenger airbag location. – trip computer and warning system
12 Instrument panel.
information readout,
6 Location for radio, navigation system
or storage compartments. 13 Horn. – multimedia system voice control.

7 Central demister outlet. 14 Steering column stalk for windscreen 23 Radio remote control.
and rear screen wash/wiper.
8 Centre air vents. 24 Bonnet release control.
15 Tweeter.
9 Start button. 25 Beam height adjustment control.
16 Side demister outlet.
26 Function settings controls:
17 Side air vent.
– speed limiter,
18 Passenger airbag activation/deacti- – cruise control.
vation switch.

1.67
DRIVING POSITION, RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (3/4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

37 36 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19

35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

1.68
DRIVING POSITION, RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (4/4)
The presence of the equipment DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

27 Main switch for: 28 Heating or air conditioning controls. 33 Bottle holders.

– activation/deactivation of ESC
version 4x4 (4WD), 29 Multimedia sockets. 34 Gearstick.

– activating/deactivating the system 30 Handbrake. 35 Cigarette lighter or accessories

camera in multiple view, socket.
– activation/deactivation of the 31 Main switch for:
parking distance control, – speed limiter, 36 Glovebox.
– activation/deactivation of central – cruise control. 37 Fuse box.
door locking,
– activation/deactivation of the 32 4x2 (2WD) and 4x4 (4WD) mode
hazard warning lights, selector.
– activation/deactivation of ECO
mode,
– activating/deactivating the Stop
and Start function,
– activation/deactivation of the hill
descent control function.

1.69
WARNING LIGHTS (1/6)
The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

The © warning light means

you should drive very carefully to
an approved dealer as soon as pos-
sible. If you fail to follow this recom-
Instrument panel A mendation, you risk damaging your
vehicle.

If no lights or sounds are ap-

parent, this indicates a fault
in the instrument panel. This Warning light ® re-
indicates that it is essential quires you to stop immedi-
to stop immediately (as soon as traf- ately, for your own safety,
fic conditions allow). Ensure that the as soon as traffic conditions
vehicle is correctly immobilised and allow. Switch off the engine and do
contact an approved Dealer. not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.

1.70
WARNING LIGHTS (2/6)
The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

® Urgent stop warning light Coolant temperature warn-

(red)
Ô ing light
This lights up when the ignition is This lights up blue when you switch on
switched on and goes out as soon as the ignition or start the engine.
A the engine is started. It lights up at the
same time as other warning lights, and If it turns red, stop and let the engine
is accompanied by a beep. idle for a minute or two.
It requires you to stop immediately, for The temperature should drop and the
your own safety, as soon as traffic con- warning light should switch off or turn
ditions allow. Switch off the engine and blue again. Otherwise, stop the engine.
do not restart it. Let the engine cool down before check-
Contact an approved Dealer. ing the coolant.
Contact an approved Dealer.
© Warning light (orange)
Brake pedal warning light

Brake circuit fault warning

This lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out as soon as
 This lights up when the brake
D light the engine is started. It may comes on
in conjunction with other warning lights
pedal should be depressed.

It lights up when the ignition or the on the instrument panel.

engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds. It means you should drive very care-
fully to an authorised dealer as soon
If it comes on during braking and is ac- as possible. If you fail to follow this rec-
companied by the ® warning light ommendation, you risk damaging your
and a beep, it indicates that the fluid vehicle.
level in the circuit is low or that there is
a braking system fault. Stop as soon as
traffic conditions allow and contact an
authorised dealer.

1.71
WARNING LIGHTS (3/6)
The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Preheating warning light Anti-lock braking warning

É (diesel version)
This should come on when the igni-
x light
This lights up when the ignition is
tion is switched on. It indicates that the switched on and goes out after a few
heater plugs are in operation. It goes seconds.
A out after preheating is sufficient and the
engine can be started. If it does not go out after the ignition is
switched on, or lights up when driving,
Indicator lightAirbag
å This lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on and goes out after
there is a fault with the ABS. Braking
will then be as normal, without the ABS.
Contact an approved Dealer as soon as
a few seconds. If it does not light up possible.
when the ignition is switched on, if it
lights up when the engine is running, Warning light for reagent
or if it flashes, it indicates a fault in the  level and faults in the exhaust
gas reduction system
system.
Contact an approved Dealer as soon as Refer to the information on “Reagent
Oil pressure warning light
À This lights up when the ignition
is switched on and goes out after a few
possible.
Low fuel level warning light
tank” in Section 1.

seconds. L It lights up orange when the ig-

nition or the engine is switched on then,
äæ Gear change indicator
This lights up to advise
If it comes on on the road, accompa-
depending on the vehicle, goes off after you to change to a higher gear (up
nied by the ® warning light and a arrow) or lower gear (down arrow).
beep, stop immediately and cut the ig- a few seconds or is displayed in white.
nition. If it comes on orange while driving and
Check the oil level (refer to “Engine oil is accompanied by a beep, fill up with
level: general information” in Section fuel as soon as possible. There is only
4). If the level is normal, the light has approximately 31 miles (50 km) worth
come on for another reason: Consult an of fuel left.
authorised dealer straight away.

1.72
WARNING LIGHTS (4/6)
The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Warning light for the elec- Speed limiter warning light

 tronic stability program
(ESC) and traction control system
Ð Refer to the information on the
“Speed limiter” in Section 2.
This lights up when the ignition is Excess speed warning light
A switched on and goes out after a few
seconds.
 A beep will sound and the warn-
ing light will come on if the vehicle ex-
There are several reasons for the warn- ceeds 70 mph (120 km/h).
ing light to come on: refer to the para- Hill Descent Control indica-
graph “Electronic stability program ESC
with understeer control and traction
 tor light
control” in Section 2. Refer to information on “Driver correc-
tion devices and aids” in Section 2.
Indicator light ESC OFF
 Refer to the information on  Engine standby warning
light
“Driving correction devices and aids” in
Section 2. Please see information in the para-
Battery charge warning light
Ú It lights up when the ignition or 2 Door(s) open warning light
graph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
the engine is switched on and goes off
Unavailability of engine
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa-
Refer to “Opening/closing the doors” in
Section 1.
 standby warning light
Cruise control warning Please see information in the para-
nied by the ® warning light and a
beep, this indicates an overload or dis-
Ϧ lights graph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
charge in the electrical circuit. Refer to the information on “Cruise con-
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow trol” in Section 2.
and contact an approved Dealer.

1.73
WARNING LIGHTS (5/6)
The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Left-hand direction indicator Variable power-assisted

c tell-tale U steering warning light
Right-hand direction indica- It lights up when the ignition or the
b tor tell-tale engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
A Toxic Fume Filter System
Ä Warning Light It may also light up during battery trou-
bleshooting: refer to the information on
On vehicles which are equipped with it,
this light comes on when the engine is “Steering wheel, Power-assisted steer-
started and, depending on the vehicle, ing” in Section 1.
when the ignition is switched off if the If it comes on while driving, alongside
vehicle is in the engine standby phase the warning light ® , this means
(refer to the information on the “Stop there is a system fault.
and Start function” in Section 2) then
Contact an authorised dealer.
goes out.
Particle filter system warn-
š Side light warning light – If it lights up continuously, consult
your approved dealer as soon as
 ing light
possible; Please refer to the information on
Main beam headlight tell-tale
á light – if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
“Special features of petrol versions”
and “Special features of diesel ver-
Dipped beam headlight tell- sions” in section 2.
k tale
your approved Dealer as soon as
possible.
Front fog light tell-tale light
g Refer to the information on “Advice:
antipollution, fuel economy and driving”
Rear fog light tell-tale in Section 2.
f

1.74
WARNING LIGHTS (6/6)
The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Mode warning light ECO Driver’s seat belt reminder

 ß and, depending on the vehi-
cle, front passenger seat belt re-
This comes on when ECO mode is ac- B
tivated. minder
Please refer to the information on This lights up when the ignition is
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in switched on, then, if the driver's or front
Section 2. passenger's (if this seat is occupied)
4-wheel drive mode indica- seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle
’ tor light
Refer to the information on “4WD Lock
has reached approximately 12.4 mph
(20 km/h), it flashes and a beep sounds
mode” in Section 2. for around 2 minutes.

2-wheel drive mode indica- Note: an object placed on the passen-

‘ tor light
Refer to the information on “2WD
ger seat base can activate the warning
light.
mode” in Section 2.
On display B
Problem applying hand-
} brake
Please refer to “Handbrake” section in
 Passenger Airbag ON
Refer to the information on
Section 2. “Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
Tyre pressure loss warning
 Please refer to the information ¹ Passenger Airbag OFF
Refer to the information on
on the “Tyre pressure loss warning” in “Child safety: deactivating/activating
Section 2. the front passenger airbag” in
Section 1).

1.75
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/2)

4
2

Rev counter 1 (rpm x 1000) Automatic gearbox display 2 Speedometer 3 and,

This indicates the gear engaged. Refer depending on the vehicle, 4
to information on the “Automatic gear- (km or miles per hour)
box” in Section 2. Control your speed according to the ap-
proved speedometer only 3.
The indicator 4 is provided as an indi-
cation.

1.76
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/2)

A B

Fuel gauge warning light 5 Trip computer and warning

or 6 system A or B
The number of squares lit shows the Refer to the information on the “Trip
fuel level. When it is at minimum, the computer and warning system” in
squares disappear and the low fuel Section 1.
level warning light comes on, depen-
ding on the vehicle.

In 4x4 (4WD) mode on rough ter-

rain, there is a risk that incorrect in-
formation on the fuel level may be
displayed. Wait until you are on flat
ground again for a stable reading of
the oil level squares.

1.77
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (1/2)
Display selection keys 2 or 3 g) estimated range with remaining rea-
gent;
1 Scroll through the following information
by repeated short presses on button 2 h) engine coolant temperature;
or 3 (the display depends on the vehicle i) clock and exterior temperature;
equipment and country):
2 j) general adjustment.
a) total mileage and trip mileage re-
corder;
b) journey parameters:
3 – average fuel consumption;
– current fuel consumption;
– estimated range with remaining
fuel;
– distance travelled;
Trip computer and warning – average speed;
system 1
– LPG average fuel consumption;
Depending on the vehicle, this includes
the following functions: – estimated range with remaining
LPG fuel;
– distance travelled;
– LPG range;
– journey parameters;
c) current speed;
– information messages;
d) distance before service;
– operating fault messages (associ-
e) tyre pressure reset;
ated with the © warning light);
f) trip log, operating faults and informa-
– warning messages (associated with
tion message readout;
the ® warning light);
All these functions are described on the
following pages.

1.78
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (2/2)
Interpreting some of the Automatic resetting of the
values displayed after journey parameters
resetting Resetting occurs automatically when
The values showing average fuel con- the maximum value of any of the pa-
sumption and average speed will rameters is exceeded.
2 become more stable and reliable the
further you have travelled since the last
time the Reset button was pressed.

3 The average fuel consumption may de-

crease when:
– the vehicle stops accelerating;
– the engine reaches its operating
temperature (if the engine was cold
when the reset key was pressed);
Trip mileage resetting – when driving from an urban area
With ‘trip mileage recorder’ selected on onto the open road.
the display, press on button 2 or 3 until
the mileage recorder resets to zero.

Resetting the journey

parameters (reset button)
With one of the journey parameters se-
lected on the display, press button 2 Special features of LPG versions
or 3 until the display resets. To access the information and reset
the LPG trip parameters (refer to
the following pages), please switch
to LPG mode. Refer to the “Special
features of LPG versions” para-
graph in Section 2.

1.79
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (1/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

101778 km
112.4 km a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.

Average b) Journey parameters:

Average fuel consumption.
The value is displayed after having travelled at least 400 metres since the last
5.8 L/100 reset.

Current
Current fuel consumption.
Value displayed after reaching a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), depending on the
7.4 L/100 vehicle.

1.80
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (2/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

Range b) Journey parameters (continued):

Estimated range with remaining fuel.
541 km The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.

Distance
Distance travelled since last reset.
522 km

Average
Average speed since the last reset.
123.4 km/h The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.

1.81
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (3/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

Average LPG
b) Trip parameters (continued):
–-.- L/100 Average LPG fuel consumption

Range LPG
Estimated range with remaining LPG fuel.
–-- km

Distance LPG
Distance travelled on LPG fuel since the last reset.
–-- km

55.8 mph (90 km/h) c) Current speed (depending on the vehicle).

1.82
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (4/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

Petrol mode.

LPG mode.

1.83
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (5/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections
On-board computer with mileage- Interpreting the display selected
before-service message
d) Mileage before service.
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running and
SERVICE Service in the display set to “SERVICE INTERVALS”, press button 3 or 4
INTERVALS 30 000 Km / 12 mo. for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before ser-
vice (distance or time to the next service). When the distance
value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:
– range less than 930 miles (1,500 km) or one month: the
Service due in message “Service due in” is displayed accompanied by the
nearest term (distance or time);
300 Km / 24 Days
– range equal to 0 miles (0 km) or date of service reached:
the message “Service Required” is displayed accompanied
by the warning light ©.
The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.
Service Required

Reset: to reset the distance before the next service, press and hold button 2 or 3 for approximately 10 seconds until the display
shows the mileage before service permanently.
Note: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.

1.84
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (6/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections
On-board computer with distance before Interpreting the display selected
next service message (cntd.)
d) Mileage before service
With the ignition on, the engine not running and the display
SERVICE Oil change in showing “SERVICE INTERVALS”, press button 3 or 4 for about
INTERVALS 30 000 Km / 12 mo. 5 seconds to display the mileage before the next service, then
press button 2 to view the mileage before the next oil change
(distance or time remaining before the next service). When the
distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible
Service due in scenarios:
– range less than 930 miles (1,500 km) or one month: the
300 Km / 24 Days
message “Service due in” is displayed accompanied by the
nearest term (distance or time);
– range equal to 0 miles (0 km) or date of oil change reached:
the message “Service Required” is displayed accompanied
Service Required by the warning light ©.
The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.

Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed,
door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can
therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.
Reset: to reset the distance before the next service, press and hold button 2 or 3 for approximately 10 seconds until the display
shows the mileage before oil change permanently.
NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.

1.85
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (7/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

e) Reset the tyre pressure.

Check tyre press Please refer to the information on the “Tyre pres-
and init. sure loss warning” in Section 2.

f) Trip log.
No message Successive display:
memorised – information messages (ESC deactivated/acti-
vated, STOP and START activated etc.);
– operating fault messages (check the injection
system, airbag etc.).

g) Estimated range with remaining reagent.

Top Up AdBlue Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in
before 2400 km Section 1.

1.86
TRIP COMPUTER: journey parameters (8/8)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

h) Engine coolant temperature.

i) Clock and outdoor temperature.

j) General settings.
Settings
Press button 3 or 4 for approximately 5 seconds
(press and hold)
to select the display language.

Settings
Indicates that to access the “General settings”
access when the menu, you must stop the vehicle.
vehicle is stationary

1.87
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages
These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.
Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

“Parking brake on” Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.

“Vehicle Checks
Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.
in Progress”

“Turn steering Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering
wheel + START” column.

“Steering wheel
Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.
not locked”

1.88
TRIP COMPUTER: operating fault messages

These appear with the © warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an approved dealer as
soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The
© warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

“Clean Diesel Filter” Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.

“Check Anti-Theft Steering Lock” Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil
level sensor.

“WARNING: Check Airbag” Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event
of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.

“Check Anti- Pollution System” – Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s emission control system.
– Indicates a fault in the emissions reduction system when it is accompanied by
the  warning light. Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in Section 1.

“WARNING: Check SOS Call” Indicates a fault in the emergency call system.

1.89
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message

These appear with the ® warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
Some examples of warning messages are given below. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually or al-
ternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

“Engine failure hazard” Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle’s engine has overheated or there is a
serious engine fault.

“Power steering fault” Indicates a fault in the steering system.

“WARNING: Braking System” Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake ma-
nually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.

“Electric failure DANGER” Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).

“WARNING: Gearbox Failure Risk” Indicates an automatic gearbox fault.

1.90
STEERING-WHEEL, POWER-ASSISTED STEERING (1/2)
Activating the function
2
With the ignition on, press the switch 2,
the warning light integrated in the
3 switch lights up.

Deactivating the function

- Automatic:
The function switches off automatically
after the regulation phase of approxi-
1 mately 30 minutes. The warning light
4 integrated in the switch 2 remains on.
Note: If the function has switched off
automatically, press the switch 2 twice
to reactivate it.
If switch 2 is not pressed again, the
Adjusting the steering wheel Steering wheel heating function will be reactivated the next
Depending on the vehicle, the steering (depending on the vehicle) time the ignition is switched on.
wheel height and depth are adjustable. This function heats the steering wheel - Manually:
Pull lever 1 down and place the steer- in areas 3 and 4. To deactivate the function during the re-
ing wheel in the required position; lift gulation phase, press the switch 2. The
Operating principle
the lever again to lock the steering indicator light in the switch 2 goes out.
wheel in place. When the temperature is reached, the
function regulates the temperature of
Make sure that the steering wheel is the heated areas for approximately
correctly locked. 30 minutes and then switches off auto-
matically.

For safety reasons, only Never switch off the igni-

adjust the steering wheel tion when travelling down-
when the vehicle is station- hill, and avoid doing so
ary. in normal driving (power
steering and brake servo will not
function).

1.91
STEERING-WHEEL, POWER-ASSISTED STEERING (2/2)
Power Assisted Steering Special feature of Stop and Start
In the event of a battery fault (discon- With the engine on standby, power-as-
nected, discharged battery, etc.), a sisted steering is no longer operational.
reset of the power-assisted steering It returns to its original state when the
must be carried out. To do this: engine is restarted or when the speed
moves above 1 mph or 1 km/h (hill,
– the vehicle stationary and on flat slope, etc.).
ground;
– with the driver alone in the vehicle,
start the engine: the U warn-
ing light appears on the instrument
panel,
– turn the steering wheel fully to the
left, then fully to the right and return
it to the central position.

Warning light U goes out.

With the engine switched off, or if

there is a system fault, it is still pos-
Never leave the steering wheel on sible to turn the steering wheel. The
full lock when the vehicle is station- force required will be greater.
ary.

1.92
REAR VIEW MIRRORS (1/2)
Folding door mirrors
The door mirrors automatically fold out
when the vehicle is unlocked (switch 3
in position B). The door mirrors fold in
when the vehicle is locked.
In any case, you can make the rear view
mirrors fold in (switch 3 in position C) or
2
fold out (switch 3 in position A).
1 Automatic mode is then deactivated. To
reactivate it, position switch 3 to B.
A 3
B C

Exterior rear view mirrors

with electrical adjustment
Adjustment
Select the door mirror using switch 2,
then use button 1 to adjust it to the de-
sired position.

Heated door mirrors

Objects observed in the
With the engine running, the rear screen door mirror glass are actu-
is de-iced at the same time (refer to the ally closer than they appear.
“Heating, Ventilation, Air conditioning” For your safety, take this
paragraph in Section 3). into account in order to correctly
assess the distance before any ma-
noeuvre. For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.

1.93
REAR VIEW MIRRORS (2/2)

0 5
D 6
E

Exterior rear view mirrors Door mirrors with manual Interior rear view mirror
with electrical adjustment adjustment The interior rear view mirror is adjusta-
(continued) To adjust the rear view mirror, move ble. When driving at night, tilt lever 6 to
Depending on the vehicle, with the ig- switch 5. avoid being dazzled by the headlights
nition on, activate the button 4: of the vehicle behind.
– position D to adjust the left-hand rear Folding rear view mirrors
view mirror; Fold the door mirror manually against
– position E to adjust the right-hand the door window.
rear view mirror;
0 is the neutral centre position.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.

1.94
CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE (1/2)

1
12:00
B

2 3

Display A Display B
To access the 3 display for setting the Vehicles fitted with a multimedia
time, press and hold the 1 or 2 button touch-screen, navigation aid sys-
for a few seconds. tems, telephones, etc.
The hour reading flashes. You are now Refer to the separate instructions for
in setting mode, press and hold the 1 the function to understand the special
or 2 button to set the hour. features of this equipment.
Wait a few seconds, the minutes flash:
repeatedly press the 1 or 2 button to set
them.
When setting is complete, wait a few If the power supply is cut (battery
seconds before changing the display. disconnected, supply wire cut, etc.),
the clock must be reset.
We recommend that you do not
adjust these settings while driving.

1.95
CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE (2/2)
External temperature
indicator
Special note:
When the exterior temperature is - 3°C
to + 3°C, the °C characters flash (sig-
nalling a risk of ice on the road).

External temperature in-

dicator
As ice formation is related
to climatic exposure, local If the power supply is cut (battery
air humidity and temperature, the disconnected, supply wire cut, etc.),
external temperature alone is not the clock must be reset.
sufficient to detect ice. We recommend that you do not
adjust these settings while driving.

1.96
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
Direction indicators
Move stalk 2 parallel to the steering
wheel and in the direction you are going
to turn it.
2
One-touch mode
Briefly shift the stalk 2 upwards or
downwards, not exceeding the point 3
of resistance, then release it: the stalk
will return to its original position and the
direction indicator light concerned will
flash three times.
1

Horn Hazard warning lights

Press at one of the locations 1. é Press switch 3.
This switch activates all four direction
Headlight flasher indicators and the side indicator lights
simultaneously.
Pull the stalk 2 towards you then re-
lease it to flash the headlights. It must only be used in an emergency to
warn drivers of other vehicles that you
have had to stop in an area where stop-
ping is prohibited or unexpected, or that
you are obliged to drive under special
conditions.

1.97
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/4)

3 2 3
1 2 1
1

Side lights Daytime running lights

š Turn the ring 2 until the symbol function
is opposite mark 3. (front lights only)
An indicator light on the instrument If fitted on the vehicle, the daytime run-
panel will come on. ning lights come on automatically with
no action on stalk 1 when the engine is Before driving at night,
started, and they go off once the engine check that the electrical
is switched off. equipment is operating cor-
Note: Daytime running light will go out rectly and adjust the head-
automatically when the indicator is in light beams (if your vehicle is not
operation. carrying its normal load). As a gen-
When driving on the left in a left-
eral precaution, check that the lights
hand drive vehicle (or vice versa),
are not obscured (by dirt, mud,
drivers must readjust their lights
snow or objects being transported).
throughout their stay (see “Adjusting
headlight beams” in Section 1).

1.98
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/4)
Main beam headlights
5
á With the engine running and
the dipped beam headlights on, push
1 2 3 stalk 1. This indicator light on the instru-
ment panel comes on.
To return to the dipped headlight posi-
tion, pull stalk 1 towards you again.

Switching off the dipped

beam headlights
There are two possibilities:
– manually, move the 2 ring to position
š or, depending on the vehicle,
to position 0;
Dipped beam Automatic operation – the lights will go out automatically
k headlights (depending on vehicle) when the engine is switched off, the
Turn ring 2 until the AUTO symbol is op- driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
Manual operation is locked. In this case, when you start
posite mark 3: with the engine running,
Turn the ring 2 until the symbol is oppo- the dipped beam headlights switch on the engine the lights will be switched
site mark 3. This indicator light on the or off automatically depending on the back on according to the position of
instrument panel comes on. brightness of the light outside, without the ring 2, taking into account the ex-
any action on stalk 1. terior light level, without moving the
stalk 1.

Always make sure that:

– the windscreen is not obscured
(dirt, mud, snow, condensation
etc.);
– the light sensor 5 is not obscured
(by dirt, objects etc.).

1.99
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/4)
Rear fog light Turning off the fog lights
4
f Turn centre ring 4 on the stalk There are two possibilities:
1 3 until the symbol faces mark 3, then re- – manually, depending on the vehicle,
lease it. turn centre ring 4 again until mark 3
Depending on the vehicle, the stalk re- is opposite the symbol for the fog
turns to the initial position or stays in light that you wish to switch off. The
position. corresponding indicator light will go
out on the instrument panel;
Operation of the fog lights depends on – the lights will go out automati-
the exterior lighting selected, and an in- cally when the engine is switched
dicator light will light up on the instru- off or the vehicle is locked, and the
ment panel. fog lights when the driver’s door is
To avoid inconveniencing other road opened.
users, remember to switch off the rear The front and rear fog lights switch off
fog light when it is no longer needed. when the exterior lights are switched
Front fog lights off.
g Turn centre ring 4 on stalk 1
until the symbol faces mark 3, then re-
lease it.
Depending on the vehicle, the stalk re-
turns to the initial position or stays in
position.
When driving in fog or snow, or
Operation of the fog lights depends on when transporting objects which are
the exterior lighting position selected, higher than the roof, the headlights
and an indicator light will light up on the do not come on automatically.
instrument panel.
Switching on the fog lights remains
the responsibility of the driver: the
indicator lights on the instrument
panel inform you whether the fog
lights are lit (indicator light on) or not
(indicator light not on).

1.100
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/4)
Welcome and goodbye Lights-on reminder buzzer
function A warning beep sounds when the driv-
(depending on the vehicle) er’s door is opened to warn you that the
Once the function is activated, the day- lights are still on.
time running lights and the rear side
lights light up automatically on detect-
ing the card or when the vehicle is un-
locked and a beep sounds.
They switch off automatically:
– approximately one minute after light-
ing up;
– when starting the engine based on
the position of the lighting stalk;
or
– upon locking the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating the
function
To activate or deactivate the external Before driving at night,
welcome function, please see the multi- check that the electrical
media instructions. equipment is operating cor-
Select “ON” or “OFF”. rectly and adjust the head-
light beams (if your vehicle is not
carrying its normal load). As a gen-
eral precaution, check that the lights
are not obscured (by dirt, mud,
snow or objects being transported).

1.101
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM HEIGHT (1/2)

For manual settings

Examples of positions for adjusting control A according to the load

Control A

4x2, 4x4
A
Driver alone or with front passenger 0

The control A is used to adjust the

height of the headlight beams accord- All seats occupied 1
ing to the load.
Turn control A anticlockwise to lower
the beams and clockwise to raise them. Driver with a passenger and luggage (or load)
reaching the maximum permissible all-up 2
weight

Driver without passengers and luggage (or

load) reaching the maximum permissible all-up 3
weight

The table below gives some examples. In all cases, adjust control A according to
the vehicle load so that the road can be seen and other drivers are not dazzled.

1.102
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM HEIGHT (2/2)

For manual settings

Examples of positions for adjusting control B according to the load

Control B
B

4x2, 4x4

Driver alone or with front passenger 0

On vehicles fitted with this function,

control B allows you to adjust the height All seats occupied 1
of the beams according to the load.
Turn control B downwards to lower the
headlights and upwards to raise them. Driver with a passenger and luggage (or load)
reaching the maximum permissible all-up 2
weight

Driver without passengers and luggage (or

load) reaching the maximum permissible all-up 3
weight

The table below gives some examples. In all cases, adjust control B according to
the vehicle load so that the road can be seen and other drivers are not dazzled.

1.103
SCREEN WASHER, WIPER (1/4)
Windscreen wiper
s With the ignition on, pull stalk 1
A towards you.
1 A brief pull will trigger a single sweep
of the wipers, in addition to the wind-
Efficiency of a wiper blade
screen washer. Check the condition of the wiper
B A longer pull will trigger three sweeps
blades. How long they last depends
C on you:
of the wipers, in addition to the wind-
D screen washer. – it must remain clean: clean the
E blade and the screen regularly
with soapy water;
– do not use it when the screen is
dry;
– free it from the screen when it has
not been used for a long time.
Windscreen wiper
n With the ignition on, move Before any action on the
In any event, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-
stalk 1 around the steering wheel: windscreen (washing the
proximately every year (refer to the
vehicle, de-icing, cleaning
A Single wipe information on “Wiper blades: re-
the windscreen, etc.), return
A short push will trigger one sweep placement” in section 5).
stalk 1 to position B (park).
of the wipers.
Risk of injury and/or damage.
B Off. Precautions for using the
C Intermittent wiping. wipers
The wipers will pause for several – In freezing or snowy weather,
seconds between sweeps. clear the screen before starting
D Continuous normal wipe. When working in the engine the wipers (risk of motor over-
compartment, ensure that heating);
E Continuous fast wipe. the windscreen wiper stalk – ensure that no objects are ob-
is in position B (park). structing the travel of the blade.
Risk of injury.

1.104
SCREEN WASHER, WIPER (2/4)
When activating automatic wiping
or when increasing sensitivity, one
sweep of the blades is performed.
A 1 2 F
Note:
1 – the rain sensor is only intended as a
B driving aid. In the event of reduced
visibility, the driver should manually
C
activate the wipers. In foggy weather
or during snowfalls, wiping is not au-
D tomatically triggered and remains
under the driver’s control;
E G
– in the event of temperatures below
zero, automatic wiping is not acti-
vated when the vehicle is started. It
is automatically activated as soon as
Vehicle fitted with front C automatic wiper function (de-
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed
windscreen wiper rain sensor pending on the vehicle)
When this position is selected, the (approximately 5 mph (8 km/h));
The rain sensor is located on the winds- system detects water on the wind- – do not activate automatic wiping in
creen, in front of the interior rear-view screen and triggers the wipers at a dry weather;
mirror. suitable wiping speed. It is possi-
– fully de-ice the windscreen before
ble to change the triggering thresh-
A single sweep activating automatic wiping;
old and the time sweeps by turning
A short push will trigger one sweep ring 2: – when washing the vehicle under a
of the wipers. – F: minimum sensitivity; roller type car wash, return the ring 1
B stop – G: maximum sensitivity. to position B in order to deactivate
The higher the sensitivity, the automatic wiping.
quicker the wipers will react and
the faster the wipe.

1.105
SCREEN WASHER, WIPER (3/4)
Operating faults Special note
In the event of a malfunction of the au- When driving the vehicle, the wiping
tomatic wiping, the wiper is set to inter- speed slows down whenever the vehi-
mittent wiping. Contact an authorised cle stops. For example, fast wiping
dealer.
A speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
1 As soon as the vehicle moves off,
The operation of the rain sensor can be B
disturbed in the event of: wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
– damaged windscreen wipers; a C If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
film of water or traces left by a cancels the automatic function.
blade in the sensor’s detection D
zone may increase the response Precautions
time of the automatic wiper, or in- E
– In the event of ice, check whether the
crease the wiping frequency; blades are stuck to the windscreen
– a windscreen with any chip or before operating the wiping mecha-
crack level with the sensor, or a D slow continuous wiping nism. If you activate the wipers while
windscreen covered in dust, dirt, the blades are stuck down with ice,
insects, ice, the use of washing E fast continuous wiping you may risk damaging both the
wax and water-repellent chem- blade and the wiper motor.
icals; the windscreen wiper will – Do not activate the wipers on a dry
be less sensitive or may even not screen. This will lead to premature
react at all. wear or damage to the blades.

Heater jets
(depending on the vehicle)
The jets are heated if you activate the
windscreen demister.

1.106
SCREEN WASHER, WIPER (4/4)
Rear screen washer/
p wiper
With the ignition on, push and hold
1 stalk 1, then release.
Efficiency of a wiper blade
A longer action will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds Check the condition of the wiper
later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind- blades. How long they last depends
screen washer. on you:
– it must remain clean: clean the
blade and the screen regularly
with soapy water;
3 – do not use it when the screen is
dry;
– free it from the screen when it has
not been used for a long time.
Rear screen wiper
Y With the ignition on, turn the
In any event, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-
end of stalk 1 to align the symbol with proximately every year (refer to the
mark 3. information on “Wiper blades: re-
Do not use the wiper arm to open or placement” in section 5).
close the tailgate.

Precautions for using the

wipers
– In freezing or snowy weather,
Before any action involving
clear the screen before starting
the rear screen (washing
the wipers (risk of motor over-
the vehicle, de-icing, clean-
heating);
ing, etc.) return stalk 1 to
– ensure that no objects are ob-
the stop position.
structing the travel of the blade.
Risk of injury and/or damage.

1.107
FUEL TANK (1/6)

A 3

C B 2

Petrol and diesel versions Unscrew the cap 1. Use the cap
holder 3 on the flap A during filling to
Usable capacity of the fuel tank: hold the cap 1 in place.
50 litres approximately.
For details on filling the fuel tank, refer Fuel filler cap: this is spe-
To open the cover A, place your finger to the information on “Filling with fuel”. cific to the vehicle type. If
in the cutout B or, depending on the you have to replace it, make
vehicle, pull the lever 2, to unlock the After filling, refit the plug 1 and close
sure the new cap is of the
cover A: the cover will open slightly. the cover A fully by hand.
same type. Contact an approved
Depending on the vehicle, the filling dealer.
cap 1 unlocks with the ignition key. Never place the cap near a source
Otherwise, it is connected to the vehi- of heat or flame.
cle by a strip of plastic.
Do not wash the filler area with a
high-pressure washer.

1.108
FUEL TANK (2/6)
Fuel grade Petrol version
Always use a high-grade fuel that It is essential to use unleaded petrol.
complies with the legislation in force The octane rating (RON) must conform
in each country. It must conform to the to the specifications given on the label
specifications given on label C inside inside fuel filler flap C.
the fuel filler flap. Diesel version
Refer to the “Engine specifications” It is essential to use diesel fuel that con- Fuel types that conform to European
table in Section 6. forms to the specifications given on the standards with which the engines of
label C inside the fuel flap. vehicles sold in Europe are compat-
ible: refer to the “Engine specifica-
tions” in section 6.

Do not mix even small

amounts of petrol (un-
leaded or E85) with diesel.
Do not use ethanol-based
To fill up with fuel, the engine fuel if your vehicle is not compatible
must be stopped (and not with this fuel.
only on standby in the case Do not add reagent to the fuel –
of vehicles equipped with otherwise you risk damaging the
the STOP and START) function: you engine.
must switch off the ignition. Please
refer to the information on “Starting, If you wish to add an additive to the
stopping the engine” in Section 2. fuel, use a product approved by our
Technical Department.
Fire hazard.
Consult an approved dealer.

1.109
FUEL TANK (3/6)
Filling with fuel Petrol version
With the ignition off, insert the nozzle Using leaded petrol will damage the
to open the valve and insert it fully antipollution system and may lead to a
before turning it on to fill the tank (risk loss of warranty.
of splashing). To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled
Keep the nozzle in this position with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler
throughout the entire filling operation. neck contains a restrictor fitted with a
When the pump cuts out automatically foolproof system which only allows
at the end of the filling procedure, a the nozzle for unleaded petrol to be
maximum of two further filling attempts used (at the pump).
may be made, as there must be suffi-
cient space in the fuel tank to allow for
expansion.
Make sure that no water enters the fuel
tank during filling. The valve and its sur-
round must remain clean. Persistent fuel odour
After filling, refit the cap 1 to prevent If you notice a persistent
any water or foreign bodies from enter- smell of fuel you should:
ing the system.
– stop the vehicle when traffic
conditions allow it and switch off
the ignition;
– switch on the hazard warning
lights and ask your passengers to
leave the vehicle and stay clear
of the traffic;
– contact an authorised dealer.

1.110
FUEL TANK (4/6)

4 5

No modifications what-
soever are permitted on
any part of the fuel supply
system (computers, wiring,
fuel circuit, injector, protection
covers, etc.) as this may be danger-
ous (such work must be undertaken
by qualified Network personnel).
Priming bulb
(diesel version)
After a breakdown caused by com-
pletely running out of fuel, the system
must be reprimed before the engine is
restarted:
Note: the bulb is always located on the
right-hand side of the engine compart- Please note when work-
ment. ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
Operate priming bulb 5 until the fuel cooling fan may also start
flows through the hose 4.
If the engine does not start after several
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
attempts, contact an approved dealer.
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.

1.111
FUEL TANK (5/6)
Useful capacity of LPG tank: approx-
imately 7.48 gal (34 litres) or 10.78 gal
(49 litres) (depending on the vehicle).

Filling up with LPG

Engage the handbrake, stop the engine,
switch off the ignition and switch off the 6
lights. Always respect the safety in-
6
structions given at filling stations.
Depending on the country, before refill-
ing you must screw the filling adapter 6
onto the LPG filler end piece.
It is always advisable to completely fill
the tank. 6
When the pump stops delivering LPG, Filling stations without self-
or when the pump flow reduces signif-
icantly, the maximum LPG level has
service
been reached. If the service station personnel carry IMPORTANT: LPG filling
out the LPG filling procedure, you must adapter 6
At this point, do not attempt to carry on
give them the adapter 6. Depending on the country, the use
filling.
of a specific adapter is required for
LPG filling.
The filling adapter 6 is provided in
a pouch in the glove box. It may or
may not be present in the vehicle,
depending in which country the ve-
hicle was sold.
Before driving the vehicle to another
country, it is essential to consult an
If you exceed the LPG tank capacity when filling completely, please go
approved dealer to find out the type
to an accredited garage or your authorised dealer to check the automatic
of adapter to use if necessary.
filler device.

1.112
FUEL TANK (6/6)
Depending on the type of station, it may
be necessary to perform press and hold
the station button before filling will start.
When the pump finishes or if it has dif-
ficulties operating, this means that the
maximum tank fill level (80%) has been
reached.
The filling will stop as soon as you re-
lease the button. Release the stop
lever (a small amount of gas may be re-
leased), lift the pistol and place it on the
7 distributor.
8 After filling, refit the cap 7 to prevent
any water or foreign bodies from enter-
ing the system.
Filling stations with self-
service
We recommend that you wear gloves
when handling the LPG pistol.
Open your vehicle’s tank cover and un-
screw the cap 7 from the end piece of
the LPG filler 8.
Carefully follow the information explain-
ing how to refill using the LPG distrib-
utor.

1.113
REAGENT TANK (1/5)
Please ensure that you comply with the
legislation of your country.
It is important to remember that failure
to respect regulations in force could
lead to legal action being taken against
the vehicle owner.
To fill up with reagent, the engine
Operating principle must be stopped (not just on
standby in the case of vehicles
The reagent is intended for diesel en- with the STOP and START func-
gines fitted with the SCR (selective cat- tion). You must switch off the igni-
alytic reduction) system. tion. Please refer to the information
Using a reagent reduces the quantity of on “Starting, stopping the engine” in
nitrogen oxides in exhaust gases. Section 2.
Reagent consumption in real time de-
pends on vehicle usage conditions, the
equipment fitted, and driving style.

Reagent quality
Use only reagents which conform
to standard ISO 22241 and in accord-
ance with the mark on the tank filler
cap.

If the “xxxKM failure Top up

AdBlue” message appears,
fill the reagent tank and
refer to the filling instruc-
tions.
Risk of immobilisation of the
vehicle.

1.114
REAGENT TANK (2/5)
The tank can be filled at the pump. With Precautions for use
the ignition off, insert the nozzle and
When filling:
insert it fully before turning it on to fill
– handle the reagent with care.
the fuel tank (risk of splashing).
They can damage clothes, shoes,
Keep the nozzle in this position through- bodywork components etc.
out the entire filling operation. – make sure that no water enters the
A fuel tank.
When the pump cuts out automatically
at the end of the filling procedure, a If the reagent overflows, or contami-
1 maximum of two further filling attempts nates any paintwork, clean the affected
may be made, as there must be suffi- area quickly with plenty of cold water
cient space in the fuel tank to allow for and a soft cloth.
expansion.
Note: if the reagent crystallises, use a
In other filling cases, it is essential to soft sponge.
read the information shown on the rea-
gent container (e.g. the can or bottle).
Filling
Useable tank capacity:
approximately 3.30 gal (15 litres) or
3.16 gal (14.4 litres), depending on the
vehicle.
With the ignition switched off, open the
cover A, then unscrew the cap 1. Filler cap: this is specific.
Note: ammonium hydroxide vapour If you have to replace it,
may escape from the cap opening make sure it is identical to
when the tank temperature is high. the original cap. Contact The reagent must not come
an approved Dealer. Do not wash into contact with eyes or
the filler area with a high pressure skin. If it does, wash the af-
washer. fected area with plenty of
cold water. If necessary, consult a
doctor.

1.115
REAGENT TANK (3/5)
In extreme cold weather conditions
In frosty weather conditions, the rea-
gent tank should be refilled when the
 indicator and the message “Top
Up AdBlue before 1200 km” appear on
After filling the reagent tank, check
that the cap and cover are closed,
the instrument panel. start the engine and WAIT 10 sec-
Special cases onds with the vehicle stationary,
engine running before setting off
The reagent fluid freezes below about again.
-10°C. If this operation is not carried out,
In these conditions, do not attempt fill- the filling of the tank will not be
ing when the fluid is frozen. In the event taken into account automatically
of needing to top up or fill the tank with until after several dozens of minutes
of driving.
reagent (  on), park the vehicle
in a hotter location if possible so that
The message “--- TOP UP AdBlue”
and/or the warning lights will con-
the reagent becomes liquid again. tinue to appear until the filling has
Otherwise, have a qualified profes- been taken into account by the
sional top up or fill up with reagent fluid. system.

No work whatsoever is
permitted on any part of
the system. To prevent
damage, only qualified per-
sonnel from our network may work
on the system.

1.116
REAGENT TANK (4/5)
Maintenance/Range
The information displayed on the instrument panel may be accompanied by a beep.

Indicator lights Message What to do?

When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched on, you have less
“Top Up AdBlue than 1,488 miles (2,400 km) range.
–
before 2400 km”
Fill or have an Approved Dealer fill or top up the reagent in the tank.

When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched on, you have be-
“TOP UP AdBlue tween 744 miles (1,200 km) and 496 miles (800 km) range.
 comes on. before 1200 km”
Fill or have an Approved Dealer fill or top up the reagent in the tank.

The message is displayed when the ignition is switched on and is repeated:

– approximately every 62 miles (100 km), you have between about 496 miles
(800 km) and 124 miles (200 km) range;
“xxxKM failure Top – approximately every 31 miles (50 km), you have less than 124 miles (200 km)
 comes on. up AdBlue” range.
In any event, fill or have an Approved Dealer fill the reagent tank as soon as
possible.

« 0KM FAILURE The engine will not start.

 comes on. TOP UP ADBLUE » To restart, you must fill the reagent tank yourself.

1.117
REAGENT TANK (5/5)
System faults
The information displayed on the instrument panel may be accompanied by a beep.

Indicator lights Message Readings

« CHECK ANTI- POLLUTION

SYSTEM » Indicates a fault in the system. Contact your approved
 and © come on. “AdBlue quality to check” dealer as soon as possible.
“AdBlue injection to check”

Indicates a system fault and that in less than 496 miles

(800 km) it will become impossible to restart the ve-
hicle.
These warnings are repeated:
– every 62 miles (100 km) until there are between
“xxxKM failure antipollution” 500 miles (800 km) and 124 miles (200 km) remain-
 and © come on. ing before the vehicle cannot be restarted;
– every 31 miles (50 km) when there is less than
124 miles (200 km) left before the vehicle cannot be
restarted.
Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.

« 0KM FAILURE TOP UP Indicates that after the ignition is switched off the vehi-
 and © come on. ADBLUE » cle will not restart. Call an approved Dealer.

1.118
 Section 2: Driving
(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)

Running in, Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2

Starting, Stopping the engine: vehicle with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Starting, stopping the engine: vehicle with card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Stop and Start function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Special features of petrol versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Special features of diesel versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Special features of LPG versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
Driving advice, ECO-driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
Maintenance and antipollution advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
Tyre pressure loss warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Gear lever/Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Transmission: 4-wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Driver correction devices and aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52
Automatic gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
Parking distance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Blind spot warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69
Multi-view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79
2.1
RUNNING IN, IGNITION SWITCH
Petrol version “Ignition” position C
For the first 600 miles (1,000 km), do The ignition is switched on:
not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h) in the – petrol version: the engine may be
highest gear, or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm. started.
You may only expect top performance – diesel version: the engine is pre-
from your vehicle after approximately heating.
1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Service intervals: refer to the
Maintenance Document for the vehicle. “Start” position D
C D If the engine fails to start at the first at-
Diesel version B tempt, turn the key back before activat-
ing the starter again.
1
For the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), Release the key as soon as the engine
do not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h) in A
starts.
the highest gear, or 2,500 rpm. After
completing this mileage you may drive Off position A (steering lock
faster, although you may only expect applied) Special note on vehicles with
top performance after approximately To lock: remove the key 1 and turn the an automatic gearbox
3,600 miles (6,000 km). steering wheel until the steering column Refer to the information on the
During the running in period, do not ac- locks. “Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
celerate hard while the engine is still To unlock: turn the key and the steering
cold and do not let the engine over-rev. wheel slightly.
Service intervals: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehi-
cle.
“Accessories” position B
When the ignition is switched off, any
accessories (radio, etc.) will continue to
function.

2.2
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key (1/4)
Starting the engine Petrol version vehicles with an automatic
Depending on the vehicle, if a gear is – Turn the key to the start position gearbox
engaged, for the engine to be started, without depressing the accelera- Before starting, move the lever to posi-
you must depress the clutch pedal or tor. tion P.
put the gear lever in neutral. The mes- – Release the key as soon as the
sage “Neutral + START” appears on the Refer to the information on the
engine starts. “Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
trip computer to notify you.
Diesel version
In very cold conditions (temperatures
below –20°C): so that it is easier to
É Stopping the engine
start the engine, switch on the ignition Turn the ignition key to ignition “On” po-
With the engine idling, turn the key
for several seconds before starting the sition C and hold this position until the
back to “Stop” position A.
engine. preheating warning light goes out.
When starting the engine, if the outdoor Turn the key to the “Start” position D Special note
temperature is very low (below -10°C): without depressing the accelerator Depending on the vehicle, accessories
hold down the clutch pedal until the pedal. (e.g. radio) stop working either when
engine starts. Release the key as soon as the engine the engine is switched off or when the
starts. driver’s door is opened or when the
doors are locked.

Never start your vehicle

while freewheeling on a
gradient. Risk of non-ac-
tivation of power-assisted
steering.
There is a risk of accidents.

2.3
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key (2/4)
LPG version
The engine is always started using
petrol. Driver’s responsibility
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not
self-sufficient alone on your
vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
While the fuel tank is empty, the doors, for example.
vehicle cannot start or drive in Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
LPG mode only. Never switch off the igni- please remember that the tempera-
tion before the vehicle has ture inside the passenger compart-
Bi-fuel operation using LPG/petrol
stopped completely. Once ment increases very quickly.
requires the presence of petrol (for
the engine has stopped, the Never switch off the ignition
starting, high acceleration, cold
brake servo, power-assisted steer- before the vehicle has stopped
temperatures, etc.).
ing, etc., and the passive safety de- completely. Switching off the
vices such as the airbags and pre-
If the orange warning light M
pears on the instrument panel and
ap- tensioners will no longer operate.
engine disables the assistance
equipment: brakes, steering, etc.,
a beep sounds, fill the tank with fuel and additional seatbelt devices.
as soon as possible. The steering is locked when the key
is removed.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
Do not park the vehicle or INJURY.
run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
For more information on LPG ver- contact with a hot exhaust system.
sions, please refer to the “Special
features of LPG versions” para-
graph in Section 2.

2.4
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key (3/4)
Note: once the function has been acti-
vated, it cannot be disabled.
We advise you to contact an Approved
Dealer.
4

Operation
This function allows remote starting of
the engine.
Adjust the thermal comfort level as re-
1 quired (temperature, de-icing).
To start the engine remotely, press
2 the locking button 2, then within an-
other 2 seconds, press the remote start
3 button 3 for approximately 3 seconds.
The hazard lights come on continu-
Remote engine start-up ously for approximately 3 seconds and
This function also lets you programme
the engine to start, in order to heat or
the engine starts.
Initialisation ventilate the passenger compartment
The engine will run for 10 minutes. up to 24 hours before using the vehicle.
If the vehicle is so equipped, press
Once the engine is running, it is pos- Depending on the vehicle, configura-
the unlocking button 1 then press the
sible to extend the running-time for tion and programming are performed
remote start button 3 twice in succes-
10 minutes by pressing again on the using the multimedia display 4, or using
sion for about 3 seconds each time. The
remote start button 3. The hazard lights your smartphone. Please refer to the
time between the two presses must be
come on continuously for 3 seconds to multimedia instructions for your vehicle.
less than 5 seconds. The hazard warn-
confirm that the function has been pro-
ing lights will come on continuously for
longed.
3 seconds to confirm the system reset.

Before using the “Remote engine start-up” function, check that the ve-
hicle is immobilised (please refer to the “Parking brake” paragraph in
Section 2).
Risk of accident and serious injury.

2.5
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key (4/4)
Remote engine start performance The remote engine start-up operates if:
varies according to surroundings such – the lever is in neutral position on ve-
as: hicles with a manual gearbox;
– Obstacles, buildings, walls, other ve- – the lever is in position P for vehicles
hicles, etc.; with an automatic gearbox; Do not use the engine
– the vehicle is located in a high elec- – the ignition is off and no key is in- remote start-up function or
tromagnetic radiation zone; serted into the ignition switch; its programming when:
– Condition of the key/card battery. – the bonnet is closed; – the vehicle is in a garage
or in a confined space.
– all of the opening elements (doors
and luggage compartment) are Risk of poisoning or suffoca-
closed and locked when you leave tion by exhaust gas emissions.
the vehicle; – the vehicle is covered with a pro-
– in extreme weather conditions, the tective cover.
remote engine start-up by program- Fire hazard.
ming may not work.
– the bonnet is open or before it
If one of these conditions is not met, the opens.
lights will flash for approximately 3 sec-
onds. Risk of burns or serious injury.
Depending on the country, the
remote start function or its pro-
In the event that the func- gramming may be prohibited by
tion is used, please ensure law and/or by the regulations in
that power-consuming de- force.
vices (such as the wipers, Before using this function, check
exterior lights, radio, heated seats, the legislation and/or the regula-
heated steering wheel, etc.) are de- tions in force for the country.
activated and all accessories are
disconnected before leaving the ve-
hicle.
Fire hazard.

2.6
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card (1/6)
LPG version
The engine is always started using
petrol.
2

1
While the fuel tank is empty, the
vehicle cannot start or drive in
LPG mode only.
Bi-fuel operation using LPG/petrol
The card must be inserted in detection Special features requires the presence of petrol (for
zone 1. starting, high acceleration, cold
– If one of starting conditions is not ap- temperatures, etc.).
To start: plied, the message “Press Brake +
– vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
place the lever in position P, depress
START” or “Press Clutch + START”
or “Select “P” Then Press Start” is
If the orange warning light M
pears on the instrument panel and
ap-

the brake pedal and press button 2; displayed on the instrument panel; a beep sounds, fill the tank with fuel
– in some cases, it will be necessary as soon as possible.
– vehicles with a manual gearbox,
depress the brake or clutch pedal to move the steering wheel whilst
and press the button 2. If a gear is pressing the start button 2 to help
engaged, the vehicle may only be unlock the steering column; the mes-
started by depressing the clutch sage “Turn steering wheel + START”
pedal. will warn you of this;

For more information on LPG ver-

sions, please refer to the “Special
features of LPG versions” para-
graph in Section 2.

2.7
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card (2/6)
“Hands-free” starting with
the tailgate open
In this case, the card must not be lo-
cated in the luggage compartment.
2

Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves Accessories function
or to others by starting the engine, (switching on the ignition)
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the Once you have gained access to your
doors, for example. vehicle, you may use some of its func-
tions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera- To use the other functions, with the
ture inside the passenger compart- card in the passenger compartment,
ment increases very quickly. press the 2 button without pressing the
pedals.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.

2.8
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card (3/6)

4
2

Do not park the vehicle or

run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
Operating faults Depress the brake or clutch pedal, then stances or materials such
place the 3 card on the 4 symbol. Press as grass or leaves can come into
In certain cases, the hands-free card the 2 button to start the vehicle. The contact with a hot exhaust system.
may not work: message goes out.
– when the card battery is drained, flat
battery, etc.,
– near to appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (moni-
tor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);
Never switch off the igni-
– vehicle located in a high electromag- tion before the vehicle has
netic radiation zone. stopped completely. Once
The message “Place Card Near Symbol the engine has stopped, the
+ START” appears on the instrument brake servo, power-assisted steer-
panel. ing, etc., and the passive safety de-
vices such as the airbags and pre-
tensioners will no longer operate.

2.9
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card (4/6)
If the card is no longer in the passen-
ger compartment or if the card’s battery
is dead, when the vehicle is stationary
and you try to switch the engine off, the
2 message “Keycard absent: press/hold
START” appears on the instrument
panel: press button 2 for longer than
three seconds. If the card is no longer
in the passenger compartment, make
sure you can retrieve it before press-
ing and holding the button. Without the
card, you will not be able to restart the
vehicle.
With the engine switched off, any ac-
cessories being used (radio, etc.) will
continue to function for approximately
Conditions for stopping the 10 minutes.
engine Do not park the vehicle or
When the driver’s door is opened, the run the engine in locations
The vehicle must be stationary, with the accessories stop working. where combustible sub-
lever positioned in P for vehicles with stances or materials such
an automatic gearbox. as grass or leaves can come into
With the card in the vehicle, press contact with a hot exhaust system.
button 2: the engine stops. The steer-
ing column is locked when the driver’s
door is opened or the vehicle is locked. Never switch off the igni-
tion before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steer- When you leave your vehi-
ing, etc., and the passive safety de- cle, especially if you have
vices such as the airbags and pre- your card with you, check
tensioners will no longer operate. that the engine is com-
pletely switched off.

2.10
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card (5/6)
Note: once the function has been acti-
vated, it cannot be disabled.
6 We advise you to contact an Approved
Dealer.
5 8
Operation
7 This function allows remote starting of
the engine.
Adjust the thermal comfort level as re-
quired (temperature, de-icing).
To start the engine remotely, press
the locking button 7, then within an-
other 2 seconds, press the remote start
button 5 for approximately 3 seconds.
The hazard lights come on continu-
Remote engine start-up ously for approximately 3 seconds and
This function also lets you programme
the engine to start, in order to heat or
the engine starts.
Initialisation ventilate the passenger compartment
The engine will run for 10 minutes. up to 24 hours before using the vehicle.
If the vehicle is so equipped, press
Once the engine is running, it is pos- Depending on the vehicle, configura-
the unlocking button 6, then press the
sible to extend the running-time for tion and programming are done using
remote start button 5 twice in succes-
10 minutes by pressing again on the the multimedia display 8, refer to the
sion for about 3 seconds each time. The
remote start button 5. The hazard lights multimedia instructions for your vehicle.
time between the two presses must be
come on continuously for 3 seconds to
less than 5 seconds. The hazard warn-
confirm that the function has been pro-
ing lights will come on continuously for
longed.
3 seconds to confirm the system reset.

Before using the “Remote engine start-up” function, check that the ve-
hicle is immobilised (please refer to the “Parking brake” paragraph in
Section 2).
Risk of accident and serious injury.

2.11
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card (6/6)
Remote engine start performance The remote engine start-up operates if:
varies according to surroundings such – the lever is in neutral for vehicles
as: with a manual or sequential gearbox;
– Obstacles, buildings, walls, other ve- – the lever is in position P for vehicles
hicles, etc.; with an automatic gearbox; Do not use the engine
– radio interference (television, radio, – the ignition is switched off; remote start-up function or
mobile phone, other remote control- its programming when:
ler etc.); – the bonnet is closed;
– the vehicle is in a garage
– Condition of the key/card battery. – all of the opening elements (doors
or in a confined space.
and luggage compartment) are
closed and locked when you leave Risk of poisoning or suffoca-
the vehicle; tion by exhaust gas emissions.
– in extreme weather conditions, the – the vehicle is covered with a pro-
remote engine start-up by program- tective cover.
ming may not work. Fire hazard.
If one of these conditions is not met, the – the bonnet is open or before it
lights will flash for approximately 3 sec- opens.
onds.
Risk of burns or serious injury.
Depending on the country, the
remote start function or its pro-
In the event that the func- gramming may be prohibited by
tion is used, please ensure law and/or by the regulations in
that power-consuming de- force.
vices (such as the wipers, Before using this function, check
exterior lights, radio, heated seats, the legislation and/or the regula-
heated steering wheel, etc.) are de- tions in force for the country.
activated and all accessories are
disconnected before leaving the ve-
hicle.
Fire hazard.

2.12
FUNCTION STOP AND START (1/4)
This system enables a reduced fuel For manual gearboxes:
consumption and lower greenhouse – the gearbox is in neutral;
gas emissions.
The system is activated automatically and If the engine stalls while the system
when the vehicle is started. – the clutch pedal is released; is in operation, pressing the clutch
While driving, the system stops the pedal right down will start it again.
engine (standby) when the vehicle is
at a standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights,
If the warning light  flashes,
this means that the clutch pedal is
etc). not sufficiently released;
and
Conditions for engine – the vehicle speed is less than ap-
standby proximately 7 mph (3 km/h).
The vehicle has set off from where it For all vehicles:
was parked;
For automatic or sequential gear-
box:
The warning light  on the instru-
ment panel is lit when the engine is on
– The gearbox is in position D, Mor N; standby. The vehicle equipment re- Before leaving the vehicle,
and mains operational while the engine is the engine must be stopped
– the brake pedal is depressed (suffi- stopped. and not put on standby
ciently hard); (please see the information
and When the engine switches to standby,
the steering assistance may no longer on “Starting, stopping the engine” in
– the accelerator pedal is not de- Section 2).
pressed; be operational.
and In this case it becomes operational
– the vehicle’s speed is zero for around again when the engine is no longer on
one second. standby or the speed exceeds approxi-
The engine remains on standby if posi- mately 1 mph (1 km/h) (downhill, slope
etc.). Keep your vehicle station-
tion P is selected, or if position N is se- ary when the engine is
lected with the handbrake engaged and on standby (shown by the
the brake pedal released.
warning light
instrument panel).
 on the

2.13
FUNCTION STOP AND START (2/4)
Preventing the engine from Conditions for coming out of Special note: depending on the vehi-
standing by engine standby cle, if you switch off the ignition when
the engine is on standby, the warning
In certain situations, such as negotiat- For automatic gearboxes:
ing a crossroads for instance, it is pos-
sible (with the system activated) to keep
– The brake pedal is released, position
lightÄ is displayed for a few sec-
onds on the instrument panel.
D or M engaged or,
the engine running so as to be ready to – the brake pedal is released with
move off quickly. the gear lever in position N and the
Automatic gearbox handbrake off, or,
Keep the vehicle stationary without – the brake pedal is pressed again,
pressing too hard on the brake pedal. with position N engaged and the
handbrake applied, or,
Manual gearbox – position R is engaged, or
Keep the clutch pedal pressed right – the accelerator pedal is depressed
down. or,
– in manual mode, the gear lever is
moved to + or -.
For manual gearboxes:
– The gearbox is in neutral and the
clutch pedal is slightly depressed, or
– the engine is in gear and the clutch
pedal is pressed right down.

To fill up with fuel, the engine must

be stopped (and not only on standby
in the case of vehicles equipped with
the STOP and START) function: you
must switch off the ignition. Please
refer to the information on “Starting, If the engine stalls while the system
Deactivate the Stop and is in operation, pressing the clutch
stopping the engine” in Section 2. Start function for any opera- pedal right down will start it again.
Fire hazard. tion performed in the engine
compartment.

2.14
FUNCTION STOP AND START (3/4)
Conditions preventing the – parking distance control is in opera- Special cases for vehicles
standby of the engine tion; with a card
Certain conditions prevent the system – for vehicles with automatic gear- With the engine on standby (traffic jam,
from using the engine standby function, boxes, the gradient is steeper than traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfas-
including when: approximately 12%; tens the seat belt and opens the driv-
For vehicles equipped with a card: – the “Clear View” function is activated er’s door, or gets out of the seat, the
(please see “Automatic Climate ignition is switched off.
– the driver’s door is not closed; Control” in Section 3);
– the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened; To restart and reactivate the Stop and
– the engine temperature is too low; Start system, start the engine (please
For all vehicles: refer to the information on “Starting,
– the emission control system is being
– reverse gear is engaged; stopping the engine” in Section 2).
regenerated;
– the bonnet is not locked; or
– the outdoor temperature is too low or – ... Special cases of vehicles
too high;
with a key
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
– If available, the vehicle is in “4WD
The warning light appears on the
instrument panel to indicate that engine With the engine on standby (traffic
Lock” mode (please see the section standby is not available. jam, traffic lights, etc.), if you get out of
“Transmission: 4-wheel drive (4WD)” the vehicle, a beep warns you that the
in Section 2); engine is on standby and has not been
– the difference between the vehicle stopped.
interior temperature and the auto-
matic climate control instruction is
too high;
– the altitude is too high;

2.15
FUNCTION STOP AND START (4/4)
Special feature of the automatic The system is automatically reacti-
engine re-start vated each time the vehicle is started
Under certain conditions, the engine (see “Starting, stopping the engine” in
can restart on its own in order to guar- Section 2).
antee your safety and comfort.
This can occur especially when:
– the outdoor temperature is too low or Operating faults
too high; When the message “Check Stop &
– the “Clear View” function is activated Start” appears on the instrument panel
(please see “Automatic Climate and the warning light above switch 1
Control” in Section 3); 1 appears, the system is deactivated.
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
Please consult an authorised dealer.
– the vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5
km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);
– repeated pressing on the brake
pedal or braking system require-
ment; Deactivating, activating the
– ... function
Press 1 to deactivate the function. The
warning light above switch 1 lights up. Special feature of vehicles with
Pressing again will reactivate the a key: for some of these condi-
system. The warning light above tions the automatic restarting of the
switch 1 goes out. engine is inhibited if a front door is
open.

For vehicles equipped with a Before leaving the vehicle,

manual gearbox the engine must be stopped
The restart may be interrupted if the and not put on standby
clutch pedal is released too quickly Special note: with the engine on (please see the information
while a gear is engaged. standby, press switch 1 to automati- on “Starting, stopping the engine” in
cally restart the engine. Section 2).

2.16
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS (1/2)
The following operating conditions: If you notice any of the above operat-
– driving for long periods when the low ing faults, have the necessary repairs
fuel level warning light is lit; carried out as soon as possible by an
approved Dealer.
– using leaded petrol;
These faults may be avoided by reg-
– using oil or fuel additives which are ularly taking your vehicle to your ap-
not approved by the manufacturer. proved dealer at the intervals speci-
Or operating faults such as: fied in your Maintenance Service
Document.
– faulty ignition system, running out of
fuel or disconnected spark plugs re-
sulting in the engine misfiring or cut- Starting problems
ting out when driving; To avoid damaging the catalytic con-
– loss of power, verter or the starter, and to prevent pre-
mature wearing of the battery, do not
as they may cause the catalytic con-
keep trying to start the engine (using
verter to overheat and thus reduce its
the start button, or by pushing or towing
efficiency, or damage it irreparably
the vehicle) without having identified
and cause heat damage to the vehi-
and corrected the starting fault.
cle.
If the fault cannot be identified, do not
continue to try and start the engine, but
contact an approved dealer.

Do not park the vehicle or

run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with a hot exhaust system.

2.17
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS (2/2)
Particle filter Note: The indicator light may go out If the filter becomes saturated, the
after 20 minutes when the driving con- © warning light and, depending
The particle filter is used in the treat- ditions needed to clean the filter are not
ment of exhaust gases from petrol en-
gines.
completely met. on the vehicle, the  warning light
will appear on the instrument panel,
Depending on the vehicle, the warning If the vehicle is stopped before the accompanied by the message “Check
warning light disappears you will have
light  displayed on the instrument
panel indicates that the filter is becom-
to restart the process from the begin-
ning.
Vehicle”. In this case, please consult an
Authorised Dealer.
ing clogged and requires cleaning. To If the ® warning light and, depend-
clean it, when the  warning light
appears, and as traffic conditions and
ing on the vehicle, the  warning
light appears, accompanied by the
speed limits allow, drive at between “Engine failure hazard” message, stop
about 31 mph (50 km/h) and 68 mph the vehicle, switch off the engine and
(110 km/h) until the light goes out. contact an Approved Dealer.
After between approximately 5 and
20 minutes, the warning light should go
out.

Warning light ® re-

quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.

2.18
SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS: PARTICLE FILTER (1/2)
Diesel engine speed Precautions to be taken in
Diesel engines are fitted with an injec- winter
A
tion pump which prevents the engine To avoid any faults in icy weather:
speed being exceeded irrespective of
the gear selected. – ensure that the battery is always fully
charged;
If the message “Check Anti- Pollution 1
System” is displayed along with warn- – always keep the diesel tank rela-
tively full to avoid water vapour con-
ing lightsÄ and ©, consult an
authorised dealer immediately.
densing in it and accumulating at the
bottom of the tank.
When driving, depending on the fuel
grade used, it is possible that white
smoke may be emitted.
This is due to the exhaust particle filter
being cleaned automatically, and does
Engine smoke opacity label
not affect the way the vehicle runs.
You can find the information 1 on the
label A stuck in the engine compart-
Running out of fuel ment or, depending on the vehicle, on
If the tank has been completely the vehicle identification plate. Refer to
drained, the system must be reprimed the “Vehicle Identification plate” para-
after the tank is refilled: See “Fuel graph in Section 6.
tank” in section 1 before restarting the 1 Diesel exhaust emissions.
engine.
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with a hot exhaust system.

2.19
SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS: PARTICLE FILTER (2/2)
Particle filter Note: the warning light may reappear If the filter becomes saturated, the
if the driving conditions are not fully © warning light and, depending
The particle filter is used to treat of ex- met with regard to cleaning the filter. If
haust gases from diesel engines.
Depending on the vehicle, the warning
the vehicle is stopped or if the engine
speed drops below 2,000 rpm before
on the vehicle, the  warning light
will appear on the instrument panel, ac-
light  displayed on the instrument
panel indicates that the filter is becom-
the warning light goes out, the opera-
tion may need to be repeated.
companied by the message “Check in-
jection”. In this case, please consult an
Authorised Dealer.
ing clogged and requires cleaning.
If the ® warning light and, de-
To do this, when the  warning
light is displayed, continue driving ac- pending on the vehicle, the 
cording to traffic conditions and ob- warning light appears, accompanied by
serve the speed limit until the warning the “WARNING: Engine Failure Risk”
lights disappears. If possible, do not let message, stop the vehicle, switch off
the engine speed drop below 2000 rpm. the engine and contact an Approved
After between approximately 10 and Dealer.
20 minutes, the warning light should go
out.
The display of the  on the instru-
ment panel may be accompanied by an
increase in engine speed and operation
of the cooling system in order to clean
the particle filter.

Warning light ® re-

quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
To facilitate the particle filter re- allow. Switch off the engine and do
generation, carry out a long driving not restart it. Contact an approved
phase (at least 20 minutes) on main Dealer.
roads every 124 miles (200 km).

2.20
SPECIAL FEATURES OF LPG VERSIONS (1/4)
LPG vehicles
These vehicles use two types of fuel
(LPG and petrol) for bi-fuel operation. 3
They are fitted with two separate tanks,
please refer to the “Fuel Tank” para-
graph in Section 1.

What is LPG?

Liquefied petro- 4
leum gas that com-
plies with stand- 5
ard EN 589, or the 2
equivalent national
regulations. 1 6
LPG/petrol fuel mode selection Fuel gauge warning light
control 1 The display 3 indicates the LPG tank
It can be readily identified by its charac-
teristic smell. This enables the driver to manually level.
switch from one fuel mode to another. The amount of LPG indicated is an in-
Green warning light 2 dicative value.

Rapid flashing of the warning light 2 in- The message “LPG low level” is dis-
An LPG installation on a ve- dicates that the system is waiting for played on the trip computer 3 accompa-
hicle may lead to changes the necessary conditions to switch to nied by a beep to indicate that the tank
to the vehicle’s features, LPG mode. is almost empty and the engine is run-
compared to petrol ver- ning on the fuel reserve.
The constant warning light 2 indicates
sions. This may relate to the number Press one of the switches 4 “OK”, 5 or 6
that LPG mode is activated.
of seats, mass (usable capacity) to discard the message.
and towing capacity.
Consult your approved Dealer.

2.21
SPECIAL FEATURES OF LPG VERSIONS (2/4)
Note: if LPG mode is activated man- Changing fuel while driving
ually when the engine is started, the
system temporarily switches back to To switch from petrol mode to LPG
3 “petrol” mode: the green warning light 2 mode manually
goes out without a beep and the dis- Press the button 1.
play 3 indicates that petrol mode is
active. The transition to LPG is made during
the first acceleration:
As soon as the environmental con-
ditions are met (engine temperature – the LPG fuel level is activated on the
level, etc.), the system automatically display 3;
switches to LPG mode: the green warn- – the green warning light 2 flashes
ing light 2 is switched on permanently. quickly to confirm that LPG mode
2 has been selected, then stops flash-
ing when LPG mode is activated.
1
To switch from LPG mode to petrol
Starting the engine mode manually
The engine is always started using Release the accelerator pedal and
petrol. press the control 1.
– For vehicles with a key, please refer The warning light 2 goes out and the
to the “Starting, stopping the engine: display 3 indicates that petrol mode is
vehicle with a key” paragraph in activated.
Section 2;
– For vehicles with a card, please refer
to the “Starting, stopping the engine:
vehicle with a card” paragraph in
Section 2.

To access the information and to

reset the LPG trip parameters, see
the “Trip computer: trip settings”
paragraph in Section 1.

2.22
SPECIAL FEATURES OF LPG VERSIONS (3/4)
Automatically switching from LPG
mode to petrol mode
Depending on the vehicle, under cer-
tain conditions of use, the system may
opt to temporarily switch back to petrol
mode.
Once the suitable conditions are pres-
ent once again, it will automatically
switch back to LPG mode.
Note: after several unfruitful attempts,
the system may decide to remain in 2
petrol mode for the current journey. A
new attempt may be made after the
engine has been stopped completely 1
for about one minute.
LPG tank empty
If there is no more LPG remaining in
the tank then the system automatically
While the fuel tank is empty, the switches to petrol mode.
vehicle cannot start or drive in To inform the driver, the warning light 2
LPG mode only. disappears from the display. Fill up with
Bi-fuel operation using LPG/petrol LPG, refer to the “Fuel tank” paragraph
requires the presence of petrol (for in Section 1.
starting, high acceleration, cold
temperatures, etc.).

If the orange warning light M

pears on the instrument panel and
ap-

a beep sounds, fill the tank with fuel

as soon as possible.

2.23
SPECIAL FEATURES OF LPG VERSIONS (4/4)
If driving under severe
conditions
3
In very cold weather (temperature
below approximately 10°C) and de-
pending on the quality of the gas used,
the system may automatically manage
the conditions for switching between
LPG mode and petrol mode.
Note: for vehicles that are equipped, it
is recommended that you use the ECO
mode in these conditions (particularly LPG has a very specific
below 0°C) in order to maximise the smell so you will be able to
4 use of LPG mode (please refer to the detect any leaks easily. If
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” paragraph you smell gas in your vehi-
in Section 2). cle or immediately surrounding your
Operating faults
vehicle:
In the event of a fault which may affect In the event of an accident – switch to petrol mode immedi-
the correct operation of the engine, the ately and make sure there are no
system automatically switches from The main precautions to be taken are flames or sources of fire near the
LPG to petrol mode. the same as with petrol vehicles: vehicle;
This is confirmed once the message – apply the handbrake; – go to an authorised dealer.
“Check LPG injection” appears on the – stop the engine (a safety device that
instrument panel 3. stops LPG from entering the engine
Press the 4 “OK” switch to discard the is automatically triggered);
message, then contact an approved – switch off the ignition;
dealer to carry out a check.
– observe local regulations.

Do not touch, hit or dis-

mantle any part of the LPG
system components.

2.24
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (1/5)
Fuel consumption is accredited in ac-
cordance with a standard regulatory
method. Identical for all manufactur-
ers, this enables vehicles to be com-
pared with one another. Consumption
in real time depends on vehicle usage 1
conditions, the equipment fitted and the
user’s driving style. To optimise fuel
consumption, please refer to the follow- 1
ing advice.
Depending on the vehicle, you will have
various functions which enable you to
A B
lower your fuel consumption:
– the rev counter;
– gear change indicator;
– ECO mode activated by the ECO
Gear change indicator 1
To optimise consumption levels, a
button;
warning light on the instrument panel A
– the Stop and Start (refer to the infor- or B indicates the best time to move up
mation on “Stop and Start function” or down a gear:
in Section 2).
Š upshift a gear;

‰ move down a gear.

2.25
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (2/5)

A B
3

ECO mode Activating the function Disabling the function

ECO mode is a function which op- Press switch 3. Press switch 3.
timises fuel consumption. It acts on
certain power consuming systems in
the vehicle (heating, air conditioning,
The 2  warning light comes on on
the instrument panel A or B to confirm
The 2  light goes out on the in-
strument panel to confirm deactivation.
power-assisted steering, etc.) and on activation.
certain driving actions (acceleration, While driving, it is possible to leave the
gear changing, cruise control, deceler- ECO mode temporarily in order to im-
ation, etc.). prove engine performance.
Limiting acceleration enables low fuel To do this, press the accelerator pedal
consumption in urban and surrounding firmly and fully.
areas. When ECO mode is in use, it is
normal for changes in the heating level ECO mode is reactivated when you
to occur. take pressure off the accelerator pedal.

2.26
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (3/5)
– High speeds significantly affect the – Do not overrev the engine in the in-
vehicle’s fuel consumption. termediate gears.
Examples (at a steady speed): You should always use the highest
gear possible.
– reducing the speed from 80 mph – Avoid sudden acceleration.
(130 km/h) to 68 mph (110 km/h) – Brake as little as possible. If you an-
approximately allows you to save ticipate an obstacle or bend in ad-
up to around 20% of fuel; vance, you may then simply release
– reducing the speed from 56 mph the accelerator pedal.
(90 km/h) to 50 mph (80 km/h) ap- – Do not try to maintain the same
proximately allows you to save up speed up a hill, accelerate no more
to around 10% of fuel. than you would on the level. Keep
– Sporty driving uses a lot of fuel: drive your foot in the same position on the
with a light right foot. accelerator pedal.
– Double declutching and accelerating
before switching off are unnecessary
Driving advice and ECO in modern vehicles.
driving On versions with an automatic gear-
box, it is preferable to keep the gear
Behaviour lever in position D.
– Drive carefully for the first few miles
until the engine reaches its normal
operating temperature, rather than Driving problems
let it warm up while the vehicle is sta- On the driver’s side, only
tionary. use mats suitable for the
vehicle, attached with the
pre-fitted components, and check
the fitting regularly. Do not lay one
mat on top of another.
Risk of pedals jamming.
Vehicles with 4x4 (4WD) trans-
mission

2.27
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (4/5)

Tyres
The label C in the vehicle
informs you that your ve- – An underinflated tyre increases fuel
hicle has a higher ground consumption.
clearance than an ordinary – The use of non-recommended tyres
passenger vehicle. This gives it a can increase fuel consumption.
higher centre of gravity, making it
more susceptible to overturning in
the event of sudden or aggressive
manoeuvres or when cornering
sharply at high speeds.
Take extra care when the vehicle is
loaded (in particular when the load
is on the roof).
Ensure that all passengers are
wearing their seat belts. 4x2 (2WD) versions
The vehicle must not be
used in off-road mode.

2.28
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (5/5)
– In vehicles fitted with air condi-
tioning, it is normal to observe an
increase in fuel consumption (espe-
cially in urban conditions) when it is
used. For vehicles fitted with manual
air conditioning, switch off the system
when it is not required.
Suggestions for reducing con-
sumption and therefore helping to
preserve the environment:
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few mo-
ments to let the hot air escape before
starting the engine.
– Do not leave an empty roof rack
Advice on use fitted to the vehicle.
– It is better to fit a trailer for bulky ob-
– Favour the ECO mode. jects.
– Electricity is fuel; switch off all the – When towing a caravan, fit a wind
electrical components which are deflector and adjust it carefully.
not really needed. However (safety – Avoid using the car for door-to-door
first), keep your lights on when the calls (short journeys with long waits
visibility is bad (“see and be seen”). in between) because the engine
– Use the air vents. Driving with the never reaches its normal operating
windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h) temperature.
will increase fuel consumption by
4%.
– Never fill the fuel tank right to the
brim to avoid overflow.

2.29
MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE
Your vehicle complies with criteria for In addition, replacing engine, fuel – Air filter, fuel filter: a choked ele-
recycling and recovering vehicles at the supply system and exhaust compo- ment will reduce efficiency. It must
end of their service life, which entered nents with parts other than those origi- be replaced.
into force in 2015. nally recommended by the manufac- – Ignition and idle speed: no adjust-
Some of the parts on your vehicle have turer may alter your vehicle so that it ment is needed.
been designed to be recycled later. no longer complies with anti-pollution
These parts are easily removable in regulations.
Exhaust gas monitoring
order to be collected and reprocessed Have your vehicle adjusted and system
in recycling networks. checked by an authorised dealer, in ac-
cordance with the instructions given in The exhaust gas monitoring system will
Furthermore, by virtue of its design, detect any operating faults in the vehi-
moderate fuel consumption and initial your maintenance schedule: they will
have all the equipment necessary for cle’s antipollution system.
settings, your vehicle also conforms If this system malfunctions, toxic sub-
to current anti-pollution regulations. ensuring that your vehicle is maintained
to its original standard. stances may be released into the at-
The manufacturer is actively striving mosphere or damage may occur.
to reduce pollutant exhaust gas emis-
This warning light on the in-
sions and to save energy. However,
the fuel consumption of your vehicle
Engine adjustments
– Spark plugs: for optimum condi-
Ä strument panel will indicate if
there are any faults in the system:
and the level of pollutant exhaust gas
emissions are also your responsibility. tions of use, output and performance This lights up when the ignition is
Ensure that it is maintained and used the specifications laid down by our switched on and goes out when the
correctly. Design Department must be strictly engine is started.
applied.
– If it lights up continuously, consult an
If the spark plugs have to be changed, approved Dealer as soon as possi-
Maintenance use the make, type and gap specified ble;
It is important to remember that fail- for your vehicle’s engine. Contact an
ure to respect antipollution regulations authorised dealer for this. – if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
could lead to legal action being taken until the light stops flashing. Contact
against the vehicle owner. an authorised dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Refer to the information on
 “Reagent tank” in Section 1.

2.30
ENVIRONMENT
Your vehicle has been designed with Emissions – At the end of the vehicle’s service
respect for the environment in mind for life, it should be sent to approved
its entire service life: during production, Your vehicle has been designed to emit centres to ensure that it is recycled.
use and at the end of its life. fewer greenhouse gases (CO2) while in
use, and therefore to consume less fuel – In all cases, comply with local legis-
(eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to 5.3 l/100 km lation.
Manufacture for a diesel vehicle).
Your vehicle has been manufactured at Our vehicles are also equipped with a Recycling
a factory which complies with a policy particle filter system including a cata-
Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and
to reduce the environmental impact lytic converter, an oxygen sensor and
95% recoverable.
on the surrounding areas (reduction of an active carbon filter (the latter pre-
water and energy consumption, visual vents vapour from the fuel tank being To achieve these objectives, many of
and noise pollution, atmospheric emis- released into the open air). the vehicle components have been de-
sions and waste water; sorting and re- signed to enable them to be recycled.
For certain diesel vehicles, this system
using waste). The materials and structures have
also has a particle filter to reduce the
been carefully designed to allow these
volume of soot particles emitted.
components to be easily removed and
reprocessed by specialist companies.
Please make your own In order to preserve raw material re-
contribution towards sources, this vehicle incorporates nu-
protecting the environment merous parts made from recycled plas-
too tics or renewable materials (vegetable
or animal-derived materials such as
– Worn parts replaced in the course of cotton or wool).
routine vehicle maintenance (vehi-
cle battery, oil filter, air filter, batter-
ies, etc.) and oil containers (empty or
filled with used oil) must be disposed
of through specialist organisations.

2.31
TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING (1/4)

If the vehicle is equipped, this system Operating principle

detects a loss of pressure in one of the This system detects a loss of pressure
tyres by measuring the wheel speed in one of the tyres by measuring the
while driving. wheel speed while driving.
The system is fitted if there is a A label
in the vehicle. To check if it is there, The warning light  2 stays on and,
depending on the vehicle, is accompa-
open the driver’s door, location 1.
nied by the message “Inflate tyres and
init.” is displayed to alert the driver in
the event of insufficient pressure (de-
flated wheel, punctured tyre etc.).

2.32
TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING (2/4)
Operating conditions – fitting a single new tyre; Resetting the standard level for the
The system has to be reset with an in- – use of tyres not approved by the net- tyre pressures
flation pressure equal to that written work; This should be done:
on the tyre inflation pressure label. – ...
– after each reinflation or readjustment
Otherwise it risks not giving a reliable of the pressure of one of the tyres;
warning in the event of a significant loss
of pressure. Please refer to the informa- – when the standard tyre pressure
tion on “Tyre pressures” in Section 4. needs to be changed to adapt to
usage conditions (empty, carrying a
In the following situations, the system load, motorway driving, etc.);
risk coming into action late or not func-
tioning correctly: – after changing a wheel;
– system not reset after reinflation or – after using the tyre inflation kit;
any operation on the wheels; – after changing wheels around.
– system badly reset: different inflation
pressures from the recommended It should always be done after checking
pressures; the tyre pressure of all four tyres when
– significant change in load or distribu- cold.
tion of load on one side of the vehi- Tyre pressures must correspond to the
cle; current usage of the vehicle (empty,
– sporty driving with strong accelera- This function is an addi- carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).
tion; tional driving aid.
– driving on snowy or slippery surface;
– driving with snow chains; The function does not take
the place of the driver. It
cannot, therefore, under any cir-
cumstances replace the vigilance or
the responsibility of the driver.
Check the tyre pressures, including
the emergency spare wheel, once a
month.

2.33
TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING (3/4)
– press and hold (around 3 seconds) Display
3 the button 4 to start initialisation. Inflate tyres
Flashing, for around five seconds,
followed by a constant display of
the “SET TPW launched” message
The warning light
flashing).
 comes on (not
or, depending on the vehicle, the
“Operation completed” message in- This indicates that at least one tyre is
dicates that the tyre pressure refer- flat or punctured.
ence value reset request has been In the event of a flat tyre, inflate the rel-
4 taken into account. evant tyre.
Reinitialisation is carried out after a few In the event of a puncture, change the
minutes’ driving. tyre or consult an authorised dealer.
Check and readjust the pressure of the
four tyres when cold, and launch the
reset of the tyre pressure reference
Resetting procedure value.
Ignition on, vehicle stationary:
– repeatedly press the button 4 briefly
Warning light  goes out after
launching the reinitialisation of the tyre
and the “Recalibrate SET TPW” pressure reference value.
message or, depending on the vehi-
cle, the “Check tyre press and init.”
message is displayed on the instru-
ment panel 3;

For your safety, the warning

light ® requires you
to stop immediately as soon
The sudden loss of pressure in a as traffic conditions allow.
tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be de-
tected by the system.

2.34
TYRE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING (4/4)
Restart the resetting of the tyre pres- Readjustment of tyre pressures After each change of wheel/tyre, rea-
sures The tyre pressures must be adjusted djust the tyre pressure and launch the
when cold (please refer to the label lo- reset of the tyre pressure reference
Warning light  flashes for several
seconds, then stays on.
cated on the edge of the driver’s door). value.

If tyre pressures cannot be checked Emergency spare wheel

It indicates that the request to reset the when the tyres are cold, the recom-
reference tyre pressure value must be If fitted on the vehicle, readjust the tyre
mended pressures should be increased pressure and launch the reinitialisation
relaunched. by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI). of the tyre pressure reference value.
System unavailable Never deflate a hot tyre.
Inflation kit
The warning light  flashes for
several seconds then stays on, and,
After each reinflation or readjustment of
the tyre pressure, launch the reinitiali- Only use equipment approved by the
sation of the tyre pressure reference brand network, or the system risks
depending on the vehicle, the “Check being activated late or not operating
TPW” message is displayed on the in- value.
correctly. Please refer to “Tyre inflation
strument panel. Replacing wheels/tyres kit” in Section 5.
Indicates that the vehicle is fitted with Only use equipment approved by the After using the tyre inflation kit, readjust
an emergency spare wheel which is brand network, or the system risks the tyre pressure and launch the reini-
smaller than the other four and is fitted being activated late or not operating tialisation of the tyre pressure reference
to the vehicle. correctly. Please see the information on value.
System to be checked “Tyres” in Section 5.

The warning light  flashes for

several seconds, then stays on, along
with the orange warning light ©.
They indicate a system fault. Please
consult an authorised dealer.

2.35
GEAR LEVER / HANDBRAKE
Handbrake To apply
Pull lever 2 upwards and make sure the
To release vehicle is immobilised.
Pull lever 2 up slightly, press button 3
and then lower the lever to the floor. The warning light —
ment panel will come on.
on the instru-

The indicator light

ment panel
— on the instru-

goes off.
1 The red warning light on the instrument
panel will come on if you are driving
with an incorrectly released handbrake. Make sure that the hand-
2 brake is properly released
3 when driving (red indicator
light off), otherwise over-
heating, or even damage, may
Gear lever occur.

Selecting reverse gear

(vehicle stationary) An impact to the underside
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: of the vehicle (eg. striking
follow the grid pictured on the knob 1 a post, raised kerb or other
and lift the ring against the gear lever street furniture) may result When stationary, and de-
knob to select reverse. in damage to the vehicle (eg. defor- pending on the slope and/or
mation of an axle). vehicle load, it may be nec-
Vehicles with automatic gear- essary to pull up the hand-
box: refer to the information on the To prevent any risk of accident, brake at least two extra notches and
“Automatic gearbox” in Section 2. have your vehicle checked by an engage a gear (1st or reverse gear)
approved dealer. for vehicles with a manual gearbox
The reversing lights will come on as
soon as reverse gear is selected with or position P for vehicles with an au-
the ignition on. tomatic gearbox.

2.36
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (1/5)
“AUTO” mode
To activate this mode, turn the selec-
tor 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2 to
the AUTO position.
1
Operating principle
“AUTO” mode automatically distributes
the engine torque between the front and
rear axles according to the road condi-
tions and the vehicle speed. This po-
2 sition optimises roadholding. Use this
mode on any type of road (dry, snow-
covered, slippery, etc.) or when towing
(trailer or caravan). This mode is not in-
dicated on the instrument panel.
Remember that driving a vehicle off- 4x2 (2WD) and 4x4 (4WD)
road is very different to driving it on mode selector
the road. Depending on the road conditions, turn
Adapt the driving style to the mode the selector 1 or, depending on the ve-
selected (4x2, 4x4, Auto). hicle, the selector 2 to select one of the
following modes:
The safety of both you and your
passengers is your responsibility, – 2WD;
and depends on your skill and the – AUTO;
care you take when driving.
– 4WD Lock.

2.37
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (2/5)
“2WD" mode “4WD Lock" mode Note: if the vehicle is travelling at a
speed of more than approximately 50
To activate this mode, turn the selec- To activate this mode, turn the selec- mph (80 km/h) or if it travels at a speed
tor 1 or, depending on the vehicle, se- tor 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2 of between 37 and 50 mph (60 and
lector 2 to the 2WD position. Warning to the 4WD Lock position. The selec- 80 km/h) for more than one minute in
tor the returns to the “AUTO” position.
light
panel.
‘ comes on the instrument
Warning light ’ comes on the in-
“4WD Lock” mode, the system auto-
matically switches back to “AUTO”

Operating principle
strument panel. mode. Warning light ’ goes out.

The “2WD” mode uses the front wheels Operating principle

only. Use this mode on dry roads with “4WD Lock” mode distributes the
good grip. engine torque between the front and
To deactivate this mode, turn the selec- rear axles in order to optimise the per-
tor 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2 to formance capacity of the vehicle in off-
road situations. This mode should only
the AUTO position. Warning light
goes out on the instrument panel.
‘ be used in extreme driving conditions
(mud, steep slopes, sand).
To deactivate this mode, turn the selec-
tor 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2 to
the 4WD Lock position again. The warn-
ing light on the instrument panel goes
out. When the engine is stopped, 4WD
Lock mode stays on for one minute.
After one minute, the system switches
to “2WD” or “AUTO” mode depending
on the position of the selector.

2.38
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (3/5)
Special features of the If this happens: In this case, it is recommended that you
4-wheel drive transmission stop as soon as possible to allow the
The vehicle may make more noise when
’
– at first, the warning light lights
up and, depending on the vehicle,
system to cool down.
the “AUTO" or "4WD Lock" modes are Cooling may take up to five minutes.
the message “4WD Overheating” is
activated. This is normal. If the system displayed on the instrument panel. If the system detects excessive wheel-
detects a difference in the dimensions 4WD Lock mode is still active – how- spin on the front wheels, it adapts the
of the front and rear wheels (eg. un- ever, we recommend that you stop engine to run in a way that reduces
derinflation, severe wear on an axle), as soon as possible to allow the wheelspin.
the system automatically switches to system to cool down;
"2WD" mode.
– if the wheels still spin, the system au-
The © warning light lights up and, tomatically switches to “2WD” mode
depending on the vehicle, the message to protect the mechanical compo-
“Check 4WD” appears on the instru- nents.
ment panel. Drive as soon as possible
at a moderate speed to an approved
dealer.
The ‘ warning light lights up
and, depending on the vehicle, the
This problem may be resolved by message “4WD Overheating” ap-
changing the tyres. Always use four pears on the instrument panel.
identical tyres (same brand, profile,
etc.) and with similar wear.
In the event of excessive wheelspin,
the mechanical components may be
overheating.

2.39
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (4/5)
Anti-lock braking in “LOCK” mode Electronic stability program and Operating faults
(vehicles equipped with ABS) traction control when driving off-
road When the system detects an operating
When “4WD Lock" mode is active, the fault, it automatically switches to 2WD
ABS switches to off-road mode. In this (vehicles equipped with ESC)
mode, the © warning light comes
case, the wheels may lock intermit- When driving on soft ground (sand, on and, depending on the vehicle, the
tently to achieve better grip, thus reduc- mud, deep snow), we recommend that message “Check 4WD” appears on the
ing braking distances on soft ground. you deactivate the ESC function by instrument panel.
When this mode is active: pressing the “ ESC” switch.
Drive as soon as possible at a moder-
– the vehicle’s manoeuvrability is lim- In this case, only individual wheel brak- ate speed to an approved dealer.
ited during braking. This operating ing remains active. This function ap-
mode is therefore not recommended plies the brake to any wheel that is slip- For certain operating faults, the system
in very low-grip conditions (e.g., ice); ping, allowing the engine torque to be may not be able to switch to “2WD" or
transferred to the wheels with the most "4WD Lock" mode. "AUTO" mode re-
– there may be some noise. This is mains active.
normal, and does not indicate an op- grip. This is particularly useful when
erating fault. crossing a bridge. Contact an approved dealer as soon as
All the ESC functions will be reactivated possible.
when the vehicle speed reaches ap-
proximately 30 mph (50 km/h) (36 mph
(60 km/h) in 4WD Lock mode), when
the engine is restarted or when the
“ESC” button is pressed again.

2.40
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (5/5)

All-wheel drive system

– Irrespective of the mode selected, do not start the engine if one or more wheels are not in contact with the ground
(eg. when the vehicle is on a jack or roller bench).
– Do not turn the mode selector when cornering, reversing or if the wheels are spinning excessively. Only select the “2WD”,
“AUTO” or “4WD Lock” mode when the vehicle is being driven in a straight line.
– Only use tyres which meet the required specifications.
– 4WD Lockmode is reserved exclusively for driving off-road. The use of this mode in any other conditions may adversely
affect the vehicle’s manoeuvrability and damage its mechanical components.
– Always ensure tyres with identical specifications are fitted to all four wheels (brand, size, structure, wear etc.). Fitting tyres
of different sizes to the front and rear wheels and/or left and right wheels may have serious consequences for the tyres,
gearbox, transfer gearbox and the rear differential pinions.

2.41
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES, AIDS (1/5)
Depending on the vehicle, this is com- ABS (anti-lock braking Special feature of 4-wheel drive ve-
posed of: system) hicles
– the ABS (anti-lock braking In 4WD Lock mode, the system may
system); Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents
the wheels from locking, allowing the lock the wheels briefly to optimise the
– emergency brake assist; braking distance on very wet ground
– electronic stability program ESC stopping distance to be managed and
keeping control of the vehicle. (snow, mud, sand, etc.).
with understeer control and trac-
tion control; Under these circumstances, the vehi-
– hill start assist; cle can be steered to avoid an obstacle
– hill descent control. whilst braking. In addition, this system
can increase stopping distances, par-
ticularly on roads with low surface grip
(wet ground etc.).
You will feel a pulsation through the
brake pedal each time the system is
These functions are an ad-
activated. The ABS does not in any way
ditional aid in the event of
improve the vehicle's physical perfor-
critical driving conditions,
mance relating to the road surface and
enabling the vehicle behav-
roadholding. It is still essential to follow
iour to be adapted to suit the driv-
the rules of good driving practice (such
ing conditions. The functions do not
as driving at a safe distance from the
take the place of the driver. They do
vehicle in front etc.).
not increase the vehicle’s limits
and should not encourage you
to drive more quickly. Therefore,
they can under no circumstances
replace the vigilance or responsibil-
ity of the driver when manoeuvring
the vehicle (the driver must always In an emergency, apply firm and
be ready for sudden incidents which continuous pressure to the brake
may occur when driving). pedal. There is no need to pump
it repeatedly. The ABS will modu-
late the force applied in the braking
system.

2.42
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES, AIDS (2/5)
Operating faults: Emergency brake assist with
electronic brake distribution
– © and x lit up on the in-
strument panel accompanied by the
(depending on the vehicle)
messages “Check ABS”, “Check This system supplements the ABS
braking system” and “Check ESC”: and helps reduce vehicle stopping dis-
this indicates that the ABS, the ESC tances.
and the emergency brake assist are
Operating principle
disabled. Braking is always ena-
bled; The system is for detecting an emer-
gency braking situation. In this case,
– xD , , © and ®
lit on the instrument panel accom-
the braking assistance immediately de-
velops maximum power and may trig-
panied by the message “WARNING: ger ABS regulation.
Braking System”: this indicates a
fault with the braking system. ABS braking is maintained as long as
the brake pedal is applied.
In both cases, consult an approved
dealer.

Your braking systems

are partially operational.
Warning light ® re- However, it is dangerous
quires you to stop immedi- to brake suddenly and
ately, for your own safety, it is essential to stop immediately,
as soon as traffic conditions as soon as traffic conditions allow.
allow. Switch off the engine and do Contact an approved dealer.
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.

2.43
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES, AIDS (3/5)
Deactivating the ESC
1 function
In some situations (driving on very wet
ground: snow, mud, etc. or driving with
snow chains fitted), the system may
reduce the engine output to limit whee-
lspin. If this is not required, it is possible
1 to deactivate the function by pressing
switch 1.
The warning light  appears and,
depending on the vehicle, the message
‟ESC OFF” is displayed on the instru-
ment panel to warn you.If you deacti-
vate this function, the traction con-
trol system will also be deactivated.
Electronic stability program Understeer control With the Electronic Stability Program
ESC with understeer control This system optimises the action of the ESC with understeer control and trac-
tion control providing additional safety,
and traction control ESC in the case of pronounced under-
you are advised not to drive with the
steering (loss of front axle road hold-
Electronic stability program ESC ing). function disabled. Correct this as soon
(depending on the vehicle) as possible by pressing the switch 1
Traction control again.
This system helps you to keep control Note: The function is automatically re-
of the vehicle in critical driving condi- This system helps to limit wheelspin of activated when the ignition is switched
tions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip the drive wheels and to control the ve- on, or when the speed exceeds 30 mph
on a bend, etc.). hicle when pulling away accelerating or (50 km/h) in “AUTO” and “2WD” modes,
decelerating. and approximately 36 mph (60 km/h) in
“4WD Lock” mode.

2.44
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES, AIDS (4/5)
Operating principle Hill start assistance
A sensor in the steering wheel detects
the direction selected by the driver. Depending on the gradient of the in-
Other sensors throughout the vehicle cline, this system assists the driver
measure the actual direction. when starting on a hill. It prevents the The hill start assistance
The system compares driver input to vehicle from rolling backwards by au- system cannot completely
the actual trajectory of the vehicle and tomatically applying the brakes when prevent the vehicle from
corrects the trajectory if necessary by the driver lifts his/her foot off the brake rolling backwards in all sit-
controlling the braking of certain wheels pedal to depress the accelerator pedal. uations (extremely steep gradients
and/or engine power. In the event that etc.).
System operation
the system is engaged, indicator light In all cases, the driver may depress
It only operates when the gear lever is
 flashes on the instrument panel. in a position other than neutral (other
than N or P for automatic transmis-
the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling backwards.
Operating faults sions) and the vehicle is completely The hill start assistance function
When the system detects an operat- stationary (brake pedal depressed). should not be used for prolonged
stops: use the brake pedal.
ing fault, the © and  warn-
ing lights come on and, depending on
The system holds the vehicle for ap-
proximately 2 seconds. The brakes are This function is not designed to im-
the vehicle, the message “Check ESC” then released (the vehicle will move ac- mobilise the vehicle permanently.
appears on the instrument panel. In this cording to the slope). If necessary, use the brake pedal to
case, the Electronic Stability Program stop the vehicle.
When the system detects an operat-
ESC with understeer control and trac-
tion control are deactivated. ing fault, the warning light © ap- The driver must remain particularly
Please consult an authorised dealer if pears and, depending on the vehicle, vigilant when driving on slippery or
these warning lights remain displayed the message ‟Check Hill Start Assist” low-grip surfaces.
on the instrument panel after the igni- is displayed on the instrument panel.
Risk of serious injury.
tion is switched off and on again. Consult an approved dealer.

2.45
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES, AIDS (5/5)
Starting the system
2 With the vehicle travelling downhill at a
speed below 19 mph (30 km/h) going
forward or in reverse gear (position D or
R for vehicles fitted with an automatic
gearbox).
Once a sufficient gradient is detected,
2
the  warning light flashes on the
instrument panel.
During activation of the hill descent con-
trol system is, the speed of descent can
be increased with the accelerator pedal
or decreased with the brake pedal.

Hill descent control Activating/deactivating the system

– Activation: press the 2 button. The
This function enables the vehicle
speed to be limited without depressing
the brake pedal (when driving down a
 indicator light on the instru-
ment panel comes on.
steep hill). – Deactivation: press the 2button
The hill descent control operates be-
tween 3 and 19 mph (5 and 30 km/h.
again. Warning light  goes out. In the event of a fault on the
vehicle hill descent control,
Note: if the vehicle speed is above 37 use the brake pedal to stop
mph (60 km/h), the system is disabled the vehicle.

and the  indicator light goes out.

The driver must remain particularly
vigilant when driving on slippery or
low-grip surfaces.
This system does not operated if the
gear lever is in position P for vehi- Risk of serious injury.
cles fitted with an automatic gear-
box, or if the vehicle is travelling on
flat ground.

2.46
SPEED LIMITER (1/5)

2 3

The speed limiter function helps you Controls

stay within the driving speed limit that
you choose, known as the limit speed. 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2 or 3
Main “On/Off” switch.

2.47
SPEED LIMITER (2/5)

4 7

5 6 8

9 10
Controls 8 Reminder of the stored limit speed
(continued) and increase of the limit speed
(RES/+).
4 Speed limiter activation, memory
and increase (+). 9 Limit speed activation, storage and
decrease switch (SET/-).
5 Lowers the limited speed (-).
6 or, depending on the vehicle, 10
Speed limiter function standby (with
limited speed memory) (O).
7 Activation with recall of stored limit
speed (R or, depending on the vehi-
cle, RES).

2.48
SPEED LIMITER (3/5)

4 7
11

5 6
8

9 10

Switching on Driving Varying the limit speed

Press switch 1 or, depending on the ve- When a limited speed has been stored The limit speed may be changed by re-
hicle, switch 2, or 3 on the  side. The and this speed is not reached, driving is peatedly pressing:
warning light 11 illuminates in orange similar to driving a vehicle without the – switch 4 (+) or, depending on the
and, depending on the vehicle, the speed limiter function. vehicle, 8 (RES/+) to increase the
message “Speed limiter ON” or “Speed Once you have reached the stored speed;
Limiter XXX” mph (km/h) appears on speed, no effort on the accelera-
the instrument panel accompanied by – switch 5 (-) or, depending on the ve-
tor pedal will allow you to exceed hicle, 9 (SET/-) to reduce the speed.
dashes to indicate that the speed lim- the programmed speed except in an
iter function is activated and waiting to emergency (refer to information on
store a limit speed. “Exceeding the limit speed”).
To store the current speed, press
switch 4 (+) or, depending on the vehi-
cle, press, 9 (SET/-): the limited speed
replaces the dashes. The speed limiter function is
The minimum stored speed is 20 mph in no way linked to the brak-
(30 km/h). ing system.

2.49
SPEED LIMITER (4/5)
Exceeding the limit speed
It is possible to exceed the limit speed
at any time. To do this: press the accel-
erator pedal firmly and fully (beyond
the resistance point).
While the speed is being exceeded, the
4 7
programmed speed displayed on the
instrument panel flashes.
Then, release the accelerator: the
speed limiter function will return as
soon as you reach a speed lower than 5 6 8
the stored speed.
10
Limited speed cannot be maintained 9
When driving down a steep gradient,
the system is unable to maintain the
Putting the function on Recalling the limit speed
limit speed: the memorised speed will standby If a speed has been stored, it can be
flash on the instrument panel and, de- To suspend the speed limiter func- recalled by pressing switch 7 (R or, de-
pending on the vehicle, an audible tion, press switch 6 (O) or, depending pending on the vehicle, RES) or, de-
signal will sound at regular intervals to on the vehicle, 10 (0). In this case, the pending on the vehicle, 8 (RES/+).
inform you of this situation. limit speed remains stored and, de-
pending on the vehicle, the message
“Memorised XXX” mph (km/h) appears
on the instrument panel accompanied
by the stored speed.
When the speed limiter is set to
standby, press switch 4 (+) or, de-
pending on the vehicle 8 (RES/+)
to reactivate the function with-
out taking into account the stored
speed: it is the speed at which the
vehicle is moving that is taken into
account.

2.50
SPEED LIMITER (5/5)

2
3

Switching off the function

To stop the speed limiter function, press
switch 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2
or 3, in this case a speed will no longer
be stored. The orange instrument panel
warning light  goes out, confirming
that the function is stopped.

The speed limiter function is

in no way linked to the brak-
ing system.

2.51
CRUISE CONTROL (1/6)

3
The cruise control function helps you to Controls
maintain your driving speed at a speed
that you choose, called the cruising 1 or, depending on the vehicle, 2 or 3
speed. Main “On/Off” switch.
This cruising speed may be set at any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function

is in no way linked to the
braking system.

2.52
CRUISE CONTROL (2/6)

7
4
8
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid.
5 9 10
6 It can under no circum-
Controls 8 Reminder of the stored cruising stances replace the driver’s
(continued) speed and increase to cruising responsibility to respect speed limits
speed (RES/+). or to be vigilant.
4 Cruising speed activation, storage
and increase switch (+). 9 Cruising speed activation, storage The driver must always be in control
and decrease switch (SET/-). of the vehicle.
5 Decreasing cruising speed (-).
Cruise control must not be used in
6 or, depending on the vehicle, 10 heavy traffic, on undulating or slip-
Switch the function to standby (with pery roads (black ice, aquaplan-
cruising speed saved) (O). ing, gravel) and during bad weather
(fog, rain, side winds etc.).
7 Activation with recall of stored cruis-
ing speed (R or, depending on the There is a risk of accidents.
vehicle, RES).

2.53
CRUISE CONTROL (3/6)

12
11
4 8

5 9
Switching on Activating cruise control
Press switch 1 or, depending on the At a steady speed above approximately
vehicle, switch 2, or 3 on the  side. 18 mph (30 km/h), press switch 4 (+)
or, depending on the vehicle 9 (SET/-):
The warning light 11 illuminates in
the function is activated and the current
green and, depending on the vehi-
speed is memorised.
cle, the message “Cruise control ON”
appears on the instrument panel, ac- The cruising speed replaces the dashes
companied by dashes to indicate that and the cruise control function is con-
the cruise control function is in opera- firmed by the appearance (depending
tion and waiting to memorise a cruising on the vehicle) of the message “Cruise
speed. Control XXX” mph (km/h) and warning
light 11  in green, as well as warning
light 12 .

2.54
CRUISE CONTROL (4/6)
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded
at any time by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
While it is being exceeded, the cruising
speed flashes on the instrument panel.
Then, release the accelerator: after a
few seconds, the vehicle will automati-
cally return to its set cruising speed.
4
Cruising speed cannot be
8
maintained
5 9 When driving down a steep gradient,
the system is unable to maintain the
cruising speed: the stored speed will
Driving Adjusting the cruising speed flash on the instrument panel informa-
Once a cruising speed is stored and The cruising speed may be changed by tion display to inform you of this situ-
the cruise control function is active, pressing the following repeatedly: ation.
you may lift your foot off the accelera- – switch 4 (+) or, depending on the
tor pedal. vehicle, 8 (RES/+) to increase the
speed,
– switch 5 (-) or, depending on the ve-
hicle, 9 (SET/-) to reduce the speed.

Important: you are never-

theless advised to keep The cruise control function
your feet close to the pedals is in no way linked to the
in order to react if neces- braking system.
sary.

2.55
CRUISE CONTROL (5/6)
NB: if the speed previously stored is
much higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly
to reach this threshold.

4 7
8
5 10
6 9

Putting the function on Returning to the cruising speed

standby If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,
The function is set to standby if you: once you are sure that the road con-
ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur-
– switch 6 (O) or, depending on the ve- face, weather conditions, etc.). Press
hicle, 10 (O); switch 7 (R or, depending on the ve-
– the brake pedal; hicle, RES) or, depending on the ve-
hicle, 8 (RES/+) if the vehicle speed is
– depress the clutch pedal or shift into above 18 mph (30 km/h).
neutral if the vehicle has an auto-
matic gearbox. When the stored speed is recalled, acti- When the cruise control is set to
In all three cases, the cruising speed vation of the cruise control is confirmed standby, press switch 4 (+) or, de-
remains stored and, depending on by the illumination of the  warning pending on the vehicle, 8 (RES/+)
the vehicle, the message “Memorised light. to reactivate the cruise control func-
XXX” mph (km/h) appears on the in- tion without taking into account the
strument panel. stored speed: it is the speed at
Standby is confirmed when indicator which the vehicle is moving that is
light  goes out. taken into account.

2.56
CRUISE CONTROL (6/6)

1
2

3
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is stopped
if you press switch 1 or, depending on
the vehicle, 2 or 3, in this case a speed
is no longer stored. The two instrument
panel warning lights  and  go out
to confirm that the function is deacti-
vated.

Putting the cruise control

on standby or switching it
off does not cause a rapid
reduction in speed: you
must brake by depressing the brake
pedal.

2.57
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (1/4)
Only engage D or R when the vehi-
cle is stopped, with your foot on the
brake, the accelerator pedal released
and the engine running.

Driving in automatic mode

3 Place the lever into position D.
1 In the majority of driving conditions, you
will no longer have to use your gear
lever: the gears change automatically,
2 at the right time, to a suitable engine
speed because “automatic” takes the
vehicle’s load, road profile and driving
style into account.
Selector lever 1 Operation
P: Park With the selector lever 1 in P position,
R: Reverse press the brake pedal then start the
engine.
N: Neutral
To move out of position P, you must de-
D: Automatic mode press the brake pedal before pressing
M: Manual mode the unlocking button 2.
+: upshifting gear With your foot on the brake pedal (warn-
–: descending gear 
ing light on the display goes out),
move the lever out of position P.
3: displays the gear engaged in manual
mode. The display 3 notifies the driver about
the current mode and gear. For safety reasons, do not
Note: Press the 2 button to go from po-
switch off the ignition before
sition D or N to R or P.
the vehicle has come to a
complete standstill.

2.58
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (2/4)
Economical driving Special cases
When driving, always leave the lever In certain driving conditions (e.g. re-
in position D, keeping the accelerator quiring engine protection, operation of
pedal lightly depressed to ensure auto- the Electronic Stability Program: ESC)
matic gear changes at a lower engine the automatic system may change the
speed. gear automatically. Likewise, to prevent
incorrect manoeuvres, a gear change
Accelerating and overtaking may be refused by the automatic
Depress the accelerator pedal firmly system: in this case the gear display
and fully (so that it goes beyond the flashes for a few seconds as a warning.
kickdown point).
This will enable you to change down
to the optimum gear within the
engine range.

Driving in manual mode

With the selector lever in position D,
move the lever to the left into the M po-
sition.
An impact to the under- Shifting the lever repeatedly allows you
side of the vehicle while to change gears manually:
manoeuvring (e.g.: strik- – to move down through the gears,
ing a post, raised kerb or push the lever forwards;
other street furniture) may result in – to move up through the gears, push
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor- the lever backwards.
mation of an axle). The gear selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.
To avoid any risk of accident, have In very cold weather, the system
your vehicle checked by an ap- may prevent the gears from being
proved Dealer. shifted in manual mode until the
gearbox reaches the right temper-
ature.

2.59
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (3/4)
Special circumstances – In cold weather (temperatures Maintenance period
under -20°C), wait a few seconds
– If the road contour and bends in Refer to the maintenance document
before moving the selector lever
the road do not allow you to stay in for your vehicle or consult an Approved
from position P and engaging it in D
automatic mode (e.g.: in mountain- Dealer to check whether the automatic
or R, then avoid strong acceleration
ous areas), it is recommended that gearbox requires scheduled mainte-
for the first few minutes to prevent
you switch to manual mode. nance.
the engine stalling.
This will prevent the automatic gear- If it does not need to be serviced, there
box from changing gears repeatedly is no need to top up the oil.
when climbing, and permit engine Parking the vehicle
braking on long descents.
When the vehicle is stationary, keep
– On a slippery surface or surface
your foot on the brake pedal, apply
with little grip, change to manual
the parking brake, set the lever to P
mode M and select second gear
position then switch off the ignition:
before accelerating to avoid wheel-
the gearbox is in neutral and the drive
spin.
wheels are mechanically locked by the
driveshaft.

Check that the indicator

When facing uphill, to remain light P on the instrument For safety reasons, do not
stopped, do not keep your foot on panel is activated before switch off the ignition before
the accelerator. leaving the vehicle. the vehicle has come to a
Risk of overheating the automatic Risk of the vehicle not remaining complete standstill.
gearbox. stationary.

2.60
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (4/4)
To do this, unclip the base of the lever,
then insert a tool (rigid rod) into the
slot 4 and press simultaneously on the
button 2 in order to unlick the lever.
2 Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.

Operating faults
If a vehicle with an automatic gear-
box breaks down, refer to the informa-
tion on “Towing” in Section 5.
When activated, in the event that the
lever is stuck in P, depress the brake
paddle. It is possible to free the lever
manually.

For safety reasons, do not

switch off the ignition before
the vehicle has come to a
complete standstill.

2.61
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/4)
Operating principle
Ultrasonic sensors, fitted in the vehi-
cle’s rear bumper, measure the dis-
tance between the vehicle and an ob-
stacle when reversing.
This measurement is indicated by
beeps which become more frequent the
closer you come to the obstacle, until
they become a continuous beep when
This function is an addi-
the vehicle is approximately 40 centi-
tional driving aid.
metres from the obstacle. Stop as soon
as traffic conditions allow. Under no circumstances
should it replace the driv-
There is a beep when reverse gear is
er’s care or responsibility whilst re-
engaged. If the beep sounds for a long
versing.
time (about 3 seconds), this signals an
operating fault. Location of the ultrasonic sensors The driver should always look out
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors are for sudden hazards during driving:
The function does not take into account
not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, a always ensure that there are no
towing or carrying systems that are not
badly fitted/attached number plate), im- moving obstacles (such as a child,
recognised by the system.
pacted, modified (including paintwork) animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small,
Note: in the event of a change in tra- or obstructed by any accessory fitted to narrow objects such as stones or
jectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of the rear and/or, depending on the vehi- posts in your path when manoeu-
collision with an obstacles may be sig- cle, to the front or sides of your vehicle. vring.
nalled late.

2.62
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/4)
Deactivating the system Operating faults
You can deactivate the system by When the system detects an operating
pressing switch 1. fault, there will be a three-second con-
The warning light above the 1 switch re- tinuous beep as a warning. Consult an
mains permanently illuminated. approved dealer.

The deactivated system can be reacti-

vated by pressing the switch again.
You must disable the function if:
1 – if towing, carrying or trailer equip-
ment that is unrecognised by the
system is present in front of the ul-
trasonic sensors;
– in the event of damage to the ultra-
sonic sensors.

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved dealer.

2.63
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/4)

System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the alignment of the sensors may be altered and their operation may consequently be affected.
Deactivate the function and consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the sensors are located (repairs, replacements, etc.) must be carried out by a qualified profes-
sional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

System disturbance
Some conditions can disrupt or damage the operation of the system, for example:
– poor weather conditions (rain, snow, hail, black ice, etc.);
– in the event of exposure to strong electromagnetic waves (under high-voltage lines, etc.);
– some types of noise (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill etc.);
– fitting a non-compatible towing ball or hook;
– ...
Risk of false alarms or absence of warnings
In the event of the system behaving abnormally, deactivate it and consult an authorised dealer.

2.64
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (4/4)

Limitation of the system operation

– The area around the sensors must be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the
system.
– Small objects moving close to the vehicle (motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.) may not be recognised by the system.
– The system may not detect objects that are too close to the vehicle.
– The system may not provide a warning when the other vehicles or objects are travelling at a significantly different speed.
– When there is a change in trajectory during a manoeuvre, the system may be slow in reporting obstacles.
– When the vehicle is towing a trailer, the rear Park Assist system must be deactivated.

Deactivating the function

You must disable the function if:
– the area around the sensors has been damaged;
– the vehicle is equipped with a towing device that is not recognised by the system (electrical adapter, ball, hook, etc.).

2.65
REVERSING CAMERA (1/3)

2
1

Operation Note: make sure that the reversing

camera is not obscured (by dirt, mud,
When using reverse gear, the camera 1 snow, condensation, etc.).
located near the tailgate sends a view
of the area behind the vehicle to the
multimedia display 2 together with a
static guide line.
This system is used with the aid of a
fixed distance gauge. When the red
zone is reached, use the bumper image This function is an additional aid. It cannot, therefore, under any circum-
to stop accurately. stances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver.
The driver should always pay attention to sudden incidents during driv-
ing: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles (such as a child,
animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small, narrow objects such as stones or posts in
your path when manoeuvring.

2.66
REVERSING CAMERA (2/3)

3
3
C C 4
B B
A
A

Static guide line 3: 4 moving guide line

The static guide line 3 has coloured (depending on the vehicle)
markers A, B and C showing the dis- This is shown in blue on the multime- The screen shows a reverse image.
tance behind the vehicle: dia screen 2. It indicates the vehicle tra- The frames are a representation
– A (red) approximately 30 centime- jectory according to the position of the projected onto flat ground; this in-
tres from the vehicle; steering wheel. formation must not be taken into
– B (yellow) approximately 70 centi- account when superimposed on a
metres from the vehicle; vertical object or an object on the
ground.
– C (green) approximately 150 centi-
metres from the vehicle. Objects which appear on the edge
of the screen may be deformed.
This gauge remains fixed and indicates
the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are In very bright light (snow, vehicle in
in line with the vehicle. sunshine etc.), the camera vision
may be adversely affected.

2.67
REVERSING CAMERA (3/3)

H
F
G

D K J
E H J K
D E F G
3 3

Difference between the Reversing towards a steep downhill Reversing towards a protruding
estimated distance and slope object
actual distance The fixed guidelines 3 show the dis- Position H seems further than posi-
tances as further than they actually are. tion J on the screen. However, posi-
Reversing towards a steep uphill tion H is at the same distance as posi-
Therefore, the objects shown on the
slope tion K.
screen are actually closer on the slope.
The fixed guidelines 3 show the dis- The trajectory indicated by the fixed
For example, if the screen displays an
tances as closer than they actually are. and mobile guidelines do not take into
object at G, the actual distance of the
The objects shown on the screen are object is at F. account the height of the object. So
actually further away on the slope. there is a risk that the vehicle may col-
lide with the object when reversing to-
For example, if the screen displays an wards position K.
object at D, the actual distance of the
object is at E.

2.68
BLIND SPOT WARNING (1/4)

A This function is an addi-

tional aid which indicates
other vehicles in the blind
spot area.
This system alerts the driver to other Special feature It can never in any case be a subs-
vehicles in the detection zone A.
Make sure that the sensors are not obs- titute for care nor for the driver’s
The system is activated when the vehi- cured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.). responsibility while in charge of his
cle’s speed is between approximately If a sensor is obscured, the message vehicle.
30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h “Blind spotclean sensor” will appear on
(87 mph). The driver should always be ready
the instrument panel. Clean the sen-
for sudden incidents while driv-
This function uses sensors 1 installed in sors.
ing: always ensure that there are
the front and rear bumper of both sides. no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair,
bicycle, stone, post, etc.) in the blind
spot when manoeuvring.

2.69
BLIND SPOT WARNING (2/4)

Activation/deactivation Operation
If you press switch 2, the system is acti- This function gives a warning:
vated and the message “Blind spot alert – when the vehicle speed is between
on” appears on the instrument panel. approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and
Press again and the system is disabled 87 mph (140 km/h);
and the message “Trailer: blind spot – when another vehicle is in the blind
alert off” appears. spot area and travelling in the same
direction as your vehicle.
If your vehicle is overtaking another ve-
hicle, the indicator 3 will be activated
only if that vehicle remains in the blind
spot for more than one second.

When the engine is started, the

system remembers its position
when the ignition was last switched
off.

2.70
BLIND SPOT WARNING (3/4)
Display D
3 13
When the direction indicator is acti-
B vated, the indicator light 3 flashes when
a vehicle is detected in the blind spot on
the side towards which you are about to
steer. If you cancel the direction indica-
4 tor, the function will return to the initial
C
warning (display C).

Indicator 3 Display B
An indicator light 3 is situated on both The function is activated and has not
rear view mirrors 4. detected any vehicles.
Note: clean the rear view mirrors 4 reg-
ularly so that the indicators 3 can be Display C
seen.
First warning: the indicator 3 means
that a vehicle has been detected in the
blind spot.

The system’s detection range oper-

ates according to a standard lane
width. If you are driving in narrow
traffic lanes, it may detect vehicles
in other lanes.

2.71
BLIND SPOT WARNING (4/4)
Operating faults
3
If the system detects a fault, the mes-
B sage “Check blind spot alert” is dis-
played on the instrument panel. Call an – The system’s detection
approved Dealer. range operates according
Note: when the engine is started, the to a standard lane width. If
C indicator light 3, display B, flashes you are driving in wide traf-
three times. It is normal. fic lanes, the system might not
be able to detect a vehicle in the
blind spot.
– The system might be disrupted
D momentarily if it is exposed to
strong electromagnetic waves
(as beneath high-tension power
lines) or to very poor weather
Conditions for non-function conditions (heavy rain, snow
etc.). Remain aware of driving
– If the object is not moving; conditions.
– if traffic is heavy; There is a risk of accidents.
– the road is winding;
– if front and rear sensors both detect
an object at the same time (e.g.
when passing an articulated lorry).
– ...

Because sensors have been in-

stalled in the bumpers, it is advis-
able for any work (repairs, replace-
ments, touching up of paintwork
If a trailer is attached to the vehicle, etc.) to be carried out by a qualified
the system must be disabled with professional.
the 2 switch.

2.72
MULTI-VIEW CAMERA (1/6)
1 Activating the system
With the ignition on, the system may be
activated:
2 2 4 – in automatic mode, on changing into
reverse gear: the system is activated
and the camera located on the tail-
gate provides a view of the surround-
ings behind the vehicle on the 4
screen;
5
– in manual mode, by pressing
switch 5: the system is activated
and the camera located in the front
bumper provides a view of the sur-
3 roundings in front of the vehicle on
the 4 screen.
If fitted on the vehicle, the four cam- Note: Make sure that the cameras are
eras 1, 2 and 3 located in the front not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow etc.). Note: depending on the vehicle, cer-
bumper, door mirrors and tailgate help tain settings can be adjusted from the 4
you with difficult manoeuvres. touchscreen. Refer to the multimedia
instructions.
The cameras transmit four separate
views to the 4 screen, which makes
it possible to view the vehicle environ-
ment.
This function is an additional aid. It cannot, therefore, under any circum-
stances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver.
The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driving:
always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles (such
as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind spot when ma-
noeuvring.

2.73
MULTI-VIEW CAMERA (2/6)
Automatic mode is disabled:
– by selecting another camera view
from the menu on the 4 screen;
4 – automatically as soon as you reach
about 12 mph (20 km/h);
– by deactivating the system, refer
to the information on “Multi-view
camera - Deactivating the system”.

Manual mode
To activate it, select the desired camera
view from the menu on the 4 screen.
A message appears on the 4 screen for
approximately 5 seconds to confirm the
Automatic mode activation of manual mode.
Automatic mode is activated when re- Manual mode is disabled:
verse gear is engaged and the 4 screen
shows the view from the rear view – automatically as soon as you reach
camera. When there is a quick change about 12 mph (20 km/h);
from reverse gear to a forward gear, – by deactivating the system, refer
the 4 screen shows the image from the to the information on “Multi-view
front camera. camera - Deactivating the system”.

2.74
MULTI-VIEW CAMERA (3/6)

6
6 7
C C
3 B
B
A
A

Reversing camera 3 Fixed clearance gauge 6 7 moving guide line

If the rear camera is activated auto- The fixed clearance gauge comprises (depending on the vehicle)
matically or manually, the view from the coloured markers A, B and C indicat- This is shown in blue on the multime-
camera is displayed on the 4 screen. ing the distance behind the vehicle: dia screen 4. It indicates the vehicle tra-
– A (red) approximately 30 centimetres jectory according to the position of the
from the vehicle; steering wheel.
– B (yellow) approximately 70 centime-
tres from the vehicle;
– C (green) approximately 150 centi-
metres from the vehicle.

The image displayed on the multi-

media screen may seem faster than
reality.

2.75
MULTI-VIEW CAMERA (4/6)

8
1
D

Front camera 1 Fixed clearance gauge 8

If the front camera is activated auto- The fixed clearance gauge comprises
matically or manually, the view from the coloured markers D and E indicating
camera is displayed on the 4 screen. the distance behind the vehicle:
– D (yellow) approximately 70 centime-
tres from the vehicle;
– E (green) approximately 150 centi-
metres from the vehicle. An area of 24 in (60 cm) in
front of the vehicle is not
recognised by the system
and does not appear on the
screen. Remember this area.
Risk of damage to the vehicle.

2.76
MULTI-VIEW CAMERA (5/6)

2
4

Side cameras 2 Deactivating the system

the 2 cameras, installed in the door mir- The system may be disabled:
rors, create the side views on the 4 – when the vehicle is travelling faster
screen. than about 12 mph (20 km/h);
To activate the desired camera view, – depending on the vehicle, when the
select it on the 4 screen: See the mul- gear lever is moved to position P
timedia equipment instructions for fur- or N in automatic mode;
ther information.
– by pressing switch 5.

2.77
MULTI-VIEW CAMERA (6/6)
K
H
J
M L
F
G K L M
F G H J
6 6

Difference between the Driving or reversing towards a steep Driving or reversing towards a
estimated distance and downhill slope protruding object
actual distance The fixed guidelines 6 show the dis- Position K seems further than posi-
tances as further than they actually are. tion L on the screen. However, posi-
Driving or reversing towards a steep tion K is at the same distance as po-
Therefore, the objects shown on the
uphill slope sition M.
screen are actually closer on the slope.
The fixed guidelines 6 show the dis- The trajectory indicated by the fixed
For example, if the screen displays an
tances as closer than they actually are. and mobile guidelines do not take into
object at J, the actual distance of the
The objects shown on the screen are object is at H. account the height of the object. So
actually further away on the slope. there is a risk that the vehicle may col-
lide with the object when reversing to-
For example, if the screen displays an wards position M.
object at F, the actual distance of the
object is at G.

2.78
EMERGENCY CALL (1/3)
If the vehicle is equipped, the emer-
gency call function can be used to
call the emergency services (without
charge) automatically or manually in
the event of an accident or illness, re-
ducing the time it takes for the emer-
2 3
gency services to arrive.
Note: the emergency call operates: 4
– in countries covered by the associ-
ated telematics emergency services 1
and infrastructure compatible with
the system;
– depending on the network coverage
in the geographical region where the 5
vehicle is being driven.
1 System operation warning light:
If you use the emergency call func- – green: operational
tion to report an accident which you (network available);
have witnessed, this implies stopping – off: non-operational
where traffic conditions allow to allow (network unavailable);
the emergency services to locate your – red: operating
vehicle and therefore the location of the fault;
reported accident. – green flashing: call in progress.
In all cases, comply with local legisla- 2 Automatic mode warning light.
tion. 3 SOS button.
4 Microphone.
5 or 6 (depending on the vehicle)
Speaker.

Use the emergency call only in the

event of an emergency you are in-
6
volved in, if you witness an accident
or if you feel ill.

2.79
EMERGENCY CALL (2/3)
A call is always made as follows: Once a call is established, only the call
– the call is set up with the emergency centre can end the call.
services;
– send data related to the incident (ve- Test mode
hicle identification plate, local time (depending on local laws)
of the call, last positions, direction of 2 3 Test mode is reserved for Approved
the vehicle); Dealers to check that the emergency
– voice communication with the emer- 1 4 call feature is working properly.
gency services; To activate test mode:
– if necessary, emergency assistance – briefly press the 3 button three times;
is called. – wait approximately 15 seconds;
– briefly press the 3 button three times.
Emergency call has two modes:
Exit from test mode is automatic.
– automatic mode;
– Manual mode. Manual mode
The emergency call is carried out by:
Automatic mode – pressing and holding the 3 button for
If the automatic mode 2 warning light at least 3 seconds;
appears in green this confirms that the or
automatic system is activated. – pressing the 3 button five times
within ten seconds.
The emergency call starts automati- In the event of unintended operation, it
cally in the event of an accident that is possible to cancel the call by press-
has required the activation of the pro- ing the 3 button for around two sec-
tective equipment (seat belt pretension- onds, before the call is connected to In the event of an acci-
ers, airbag etc.). the call centre. dent, if the location and traf-
fic conditions permit, stay
close to the vehicle in order
to be able answer the call centre
quickly if necessary.

2.80
EMERGENCY CALL (3/3)

The system operates with a dedi-

cated battery. The battery service
2 life is approximately 4 years (the 1
3 warning light lights up in red to
inform you).
1 Consult an approved dealer

Without the emergency call feature,

To guarantee your safety the system is not trackable and will
and the proper operation of not be under constant surveillance.
the system, any operation Data is automatically and constantly
carried out on the battery erased, and the system stores only
Operating faults (removal, disconnection, etc.) must the last three positions of the vehi-
be carried out by a qualified special- cle.
In some cases, the emergency call may
not work (e.g. low battery). ist. Data is only sent in the event of an
Risk of serious burns or electric emergency call. Data sent to the call
When the system detects an operating centre is treated according to the
fault, the 1 warning light turns red for shocks.
personal data protection laws appli-
over 30 minutes; consult an Approved You must respect the replacement cable in the country where you are
Dealer as soon as possible. intervals (without exceeding them) located. The system stores activity
as stated in the maintenance docu- history data for 13 hours only.
ment.
The vehicle owner has the right of
The battery is a specific type. access to their data. They can re-
Please ensure it is replaced with the quest that the data be corrected,
same type. deleted or locked.
Call an approved Dealer.

2.81
2.82
 Section 3: Your comfort

Air vents, air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Heating, Ventilation, Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Air conditioning: information and advice on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Sun visor, Grab handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Ashtrays, Cigarette lighter, Accessories socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Rear headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Passenger compartment storage space and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Transporting objects in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Transporting objects: towing, towing equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Rear parcel shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Roof bars, spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Multimedia equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
3.1
AIR VENTS, air outlets (1/3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 8

1 Left-hand side air vent 6 Right-hand side window demister

vent
2 Left-hand side window demister
vent 7 Right-hand side air vent

3 Windscreen demisting vents 8 Front passenger footwell heater

outlets
4 Centre air vents
9 Rear passenger footwell heater
5 Control panel 9 9 outlets (depending on the vehicle)

3.2
AIR VENTS, air outlets (2/3)

10
12 12
10
11

11
13
13

Centre and side air vents Direction

(depending on the vehicle) Air vents 10
Air flow Move the cursor 11 to the desired po-
Air vents 10 sition.
To open: move the cursor 11 to the left. Air vents 13
To close: move the cursor 11 to the Swivel the air vent 13.
right, as far as it will go.
Air vents 13
To open press on the air vent (point 12)
until it is open as far as required.

To remove bad odours from your

vehicles, only use the systems de-
signed for this purpose. Consult an
approved Dealer.

3.3
AIR VENTS, air outlets (3/3)

15
14
16

17

Rear seats Air vents 15

(depending on vehicle) Right/left direction
Passenger footwell heater outlets 14. Move cursor 16.

Air flow
Turn control knob 17:
to : maximum air flow;
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit to : closed.
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.

3.4
HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING (1/4)
Adjusting the ventilation fan
1 2 3 4 5 speed.
Move control 3 from 0 to 4 or to W
(depending on the vehicle). The further
the control is positioned to the right, the
greater the amount of air blown into the
passenger compartment. If you want to
shut off the flow of air completely and
stop the system, set control 3 to 0.
The system is deactivated: the ventila-
tion speed for the passenger compart-
ment air is zero (vehicle stationary),
6 you can however still feel a slight flow
of air when the vehicle is moving.
Controls Information and advice on use: refer
The controls will depend on the vehicle to information on “Air conditioning: in-
equipment level. formation and advice on use”.
1 Distribution of air.
2 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen Adjusting the air temperature
and, depending on the vehicle, the Turn control 5 to obtain the desired
rear view mirrors and windscreen. temperature. The further towards the
3 Adjusting the ventilation fan speed. red the slide is, the higher the temper-
ature will be.
4 Switching air conditioning on or off.
5 Air temperature adjuster.
6 Switching passenger compartment Leaving this control in position 0 for
isolation mode/air recirculation mode prolonged periods can lead to con-
on densation forming on the side win-
dows and windscreen and problems
due to the use of non-renewed air in
the passenger compartment.

3.5
HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING (2/4)
Rapid demisting
1 2 3
Turn controls 1, 3 and 6 to:

– demisting W ;
– maximum fan speed;
– external air.
Using the air conditioning increases the
speed of demisting.

Heated rear screen

V With the engine running,
6 press the control 2. The operating tell-
tale comes on.
Switching passenger Air recirculation is used to: Depending on the vehicle, this function
compartment isolation mode/ – to isolate the passenger compart- de-ices/demists the rear screen and the
exterior rearview mirrors.
air recirculation mode on. ment from the external atmosphere
Depending on the vehicle, the function
(e.g. driving in polluted areas, etc.);
Bring lever 6 to position â. is stopped:
– to bring the passenger compartment – after a period of time set by the
Under these conditions, air is taken to the desired temperature as quickly system, the warning light goes out
from the passenger compartment and as possible. automatically;
is recirculated, with no air being taken
– by pressing button 2 again, the warn-
from outside the vehicle.
ing light goes out.

Prolonged use of air recirculation can lead to condensation forming on the side
windows and windscreen, and discomfort due to the use of non-renewed air in
the passenger compartment.
You are therefore advised to return to normal mode (external air) as soon as the
air recirculation function is no longer required, by turning control 6 to the right.

3.6
HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING (3/4)
Switching air conditioning on
1 3 4 or off
The air conditioning is switched on (in-
dicator light lit) or off (indicator light off)
using control 4.
Activation is not possible if control 3 is
set to 0.

The air conditioning system is used

for:
– lower the temperature inside the
passenger compartment;
– eliminate condensation more quickly.
The air conditioning does not operate
Distribution of air in the The air flow is mainly distrib-
passenger compartment
F uted between the front and
rear footwells and the dashboard vents.
when the exterior temperature is low.

Turn control 1 to choose the distribution Close the dashboard vents to direct all
option. the air to the foot wells.
All the air flow is directed to the
J dashboard vents. i The air flow is distributed be-
tween all the air vents, the
The air flow is directed towards front side window demisting air vents,
G the dashboard vents and the
footwells.
the windscreen demisting vents and the
footwells.
All the air is then directed to
W the windscreen and front side
window demisting vents.
Fuel consumption increases when
the air conditioning is being used
(switch it off when it is not required).

3.7
HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING (4/4)

Heated windscreen
With the engine running, press
switch 7 (the built-in warning light
comes on).
This function de-ices/demists the wind-
screen (on equipped vehicles).
To exit the function, press switch 7
again.

Fuel consumption increases when

the air conditioning is being used
(switch it off when it is not required).

3.8
AUTOMATIC AIR-CONDITIONING (1/4)
Automatic mode
1 2 3 4 5 The automatic climate control system
guarantees comfort in the passen-
ger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme condi-
tions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation
speed, air distribution, air recirculation,
and starting and stopping the air condi-
tioning and air temperature.
AUTO: allows the selected com-
fort level to be best attained, depend-
ing on the exterior conditions. Press
11 10 9 8 7 6 button 8. The integrated indicator light
on button 8 comes on.
The controls 8 Automatic mode.
(depending on vehicle) 9 Temperature display. Adjusting the ventilation
1 Adjusting the ventilation fan speed. 10 De-icing/demisting of the rear speed
2 “Clear View” function. screen and, depending on the vehi- In automatic mode, the system uses
cle, the rear view mirrors. the most suitable amount of air to reach
3 Adjusting the air temperature.
11 Ventilation speed display. and maintain the desired comfort level.
4 Switching air conditioning on or off.
You can still adjust the ventilation
5 Passenger compartment air distribu- speed by turning control 1 to increase
tion adjustment. or reduce the ventilation speed.
6 Air distribution mode display.
7 Switching passenger compartment
isolation mode/air recirculation mode
on

3.9
AUTOMATIC AIR-CONDITIONING (2/4)

3 4

Adjusting the air temperature Switching air conditioning on The displayed temperature values
Turn control 3 to obtain the desired or off show a comfort level.
temperature. In automatic mode, the system switches When starting the engine, increas-
the air conditioning system on or off, ing or decreasing the value dis-
Note: the highest and lowest settings played will not allow the com-
allow the system to produce maximum depending on the climate conditions.
fort level to be reached any more
hot or cold temperature levels (“Lo” and Press switch 4 to force activation (the quickly. The system will always op-
“Hi”). warning light above comes on) or stop timise the temperature increase or
the air conditioning (the warning light decrease (the ventilation system
above goes out). does not start instantly at maximum
speed: it gradually increases). This
may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is
a particular reason not to, the dash-
board air vents should remain open.
Some buttons have an operating
tell-tale which indicates the operat-
ing status.

3.10
AUTOMATIC AIR-CONDITIONING (3/4)
Adjusting the distribution
1 2 5 of air in the passenger
compartment
Turn the 5 control according to the dis-
tribution of air required. The integrated
warning light in the button comes on.
It is possible to combine two positions
at the same time.
All the air is then directed to
W the windscreen and front side
window demisting vents.
The air flow is distributed be-
10 8 i tween front side window de-
misting vents, the windscreen demist-
Clear View function Rear screen de-icing/ ing vents and the footwells.
Press button 2: the indicator light above demisting The air flow is directed mainly
comes on.
This function quickly demists and de- Press button 10: the indicator light ó towards the footwells.
ices the windscreen, the rear screen, above comes on. This function enables The air flow is directed to the
the front side windows, and the door rapid demisting or de-icing of the rear
screen and de-icing of the rear view
G
wells.
dashboard vents and the foot-
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It
automatically activates the air condi- mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
All the air flow is directed to the
tioning and rear screen de-icing func-
tions.
To exit this function, press button 10
again. Demisting automatically stops.
J dashboard vents.
Press button 10 to stop the heated rear
screen operating. The indicator light
above goes out.
To exit this function, press button 2
or 8 or adjust the ventilation speed by
turning control 1.

3.11
AUTOMATIC AIR-CONDITIONING (4/4)
Manual use
1 Press button 7: the indicator light above
comes on.
Prolonged use of this position may lead
to odours, caused by non-renewal of
air, and the formation of condensation
on the windows.
We therefore advise you to return to au-
tomatic mode as soon as air recircula-
tion is no longer needed, by pressing
button 7.
To exit this function, press button 7
8 7 again.

Stopping the system

Air recirculation (isolation of NB:
the passenger compartment) Turn the control 1 to “OFF” to stop the
– during recirculation, air is taken from
system. To start, turn control 1 again
â the passenger compartment and
to adjust the blower speed or press
is recycled, with no air being taken
This function is managed automatically button 8.
from outside the vehicle;
but you can also activate it manually. In
– air recirculation allows the external
this case, operation is confirmed by a
atmosphere to be cut off (when driv-
warning light above button 7.
ing in polluted areas, etc.);
– bringing the passenger compartment
to the desired temperature as quickly
as possible.

Fuel consumption increases when

The demisting/de-icing will still take the air conditioning is being used
priority over the air recirculation. (switch it off when it is not required).

3.12
AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions (1/2)
Advice on use Fuel consumption Operating faults
In some situations (air conditioning off, You will normally notice an increase in As a general rule, contact your ap-
air recirculation activated, ventilation fuel consumption (especially in town) proved dealer in the event of an oper-
speed at zero or low etc.), you may when the air conditioning is operating. ating fault.
notice that condensation starts to form For vehicles fitted with air conditioning – Reduction in de-icing, demisting
on the windows and windscreen. with no automatic mode, switch off the or air conditioning performance.
If there is condensation, use the “Clear system when it is not required. This may be caused by the passen-
View” function to remove it, then use ger compartment filter cartridge be-
the air conditioning in automatic mode Advice for reducing consumption
and helping to preserve the coming clogged.
to stop it forming again.
environment – No cold air is being produced.
Drive with the air vents open and the Check that the controls are set cor-
windows closed. If the vehicle has been rectly and that the fuses are sound.
parked in the sun, open the doors for a Otherwise, switch off the system.
few moments to let the hot air escape
before starting the engine.
Presence of water under the
Vehicles equipped with vehicle
mode ECO Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Document After prolonged use of the air condi-
Once activated, ECO mode may for your vehicle for the inspection fre- tioning system, it is normal for water
reduce air conditioning perfor- quency. to be present under the vehicle. This is
mance. Please refer to the informa- caused by condensation.
tion on “Driving advice, Eco-driving”
in Section 2.

Do not add anything to the

vehicle’s ventilation circuit Do not open the refriger-
(for example, to remove ant fluid circuit. The fluid
Use the air conditioning system reg-
bad odours). may damage eyes or skin.
ularly, even in cold weather, running
There is a risk of damage or of it at least once a month for approxi-
fire. mately 5 minutes.

3.13
AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions (2/2)
Type of refrigerant fluid
A A A Ñ
Type of oil in the air condi-
 tioning circuit
Inflammable product

Consult the driver’s hand-
 book
Maintenance

Quantity of refrigerant
x.xxx kg fluid present in the ve-
hicle.
The refrigerant fluid circuit (of which
some components are hermetically Global Wa r m i n g
sealed) contains fluorinated green- GWP xxxxx Potential (CO2 equi-
house gases. valent).
Do not open the refriger-
Depending on the vehicle, you will find
ant circuit. The fluid may
the following information on label A af- CO2 eq Quantity in weight and
damage eyes or skin.
fixed inside the engine compartment. x.xx t in CO2 equivalent.
The presence and location of the infor-
mation on label A depends on the ve-
hicle.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).

3.14
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (1/3)

1 2
6
4 5

Electric windows From the driver’s seat From the rear seats
With the ignition on and, depend- Operate the switches as follows: Press switch 6.
ing on the vehicle, the engine running, – 1 for the driver’s side;
press the switch to lower the window to
the required level. – 2 for the front passenger side;
Lift the switch to raise the window to the – 3 or 4 for the rear passengers.
desired height.
The system functions with the ignition From the front passenger
off until one of the front doors is opened seat
(limited to approximately 3 minutes). When closing the windows,
Press switch 5. ensure that no part of the
body (arm, hand, etc.) is
protruding from the vehicle.
Avoid resting any objects against a Risk of serious injury.
half-open window: there is a risk that
the electric window winder could be
damaged.

3.15
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (2/3)

7
8

Manually operated rear

windows
Turn the handle 7 to lower or raise the
window to the desired height. Safety of rear occupants
Depending on the vehicle, the driver can disable the operation of the rear
electric windows by pressing switch 8.

Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle with the key inside, and with a child, adult who is not
self-sufficient or a pet, even for a short while. They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine or activating equipment (such as the gear lever
or electric windows). If any part of the body becomes trapped, reverse the direc-
tion of the window immediately by pressing the relevant switch.
Risk of serious injury.

3.16
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (3/3)
One-touch mode Operating faults
When the vehicle is equipped with this In case of a fault when closing a window,
function, the one-touch mode works in the system reverts to normal mode:
addition to the operation of the electric pull the switch concerned up until the
windows described previously. window is fully closed, then hold the
It is only fitted to the driver’s window. switch (still on the closure side) for ap-
proximately 3 seconds, then lower the
– Fully and briefly press down on the window and hold the switch (still on the
relevant switch down: the window opening side) for approximately 3 sec-
will open completely. onds. The window closes completely by
– Briefly raise the switch concerned itself and the system is reset.
fully: the window is raised com- If necessary, contact an approved
pletely. Dealer.
Pressing the switch again while the
window is moving will stop its move-
ment.

Special features
If the window detects resistance when
closing (e.g.: branch of a tree, etc.) it
stops and then lowers again by a few
centimetres.
If you use the switch while the window
is moving, it stops working.

When closing the windows,

ensure that no part of the
body (arm, hand, etc.) is
protruding from the vehicle.
Avoid resting any objects against
Risk of serious injury.
a half-open window: there is a risk
that the electric window could be
damaged.

3.17
INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)

1 2 1

Courtesy light Map reading lights

Pressing switch 1 provides: (depending on vehicle)

– continuous lighting; Pressing switch 2 provides:

– or temporary lighting by opening one – continuous lighting;

of the front doors, or by opening one – or temporary lighting by opening one
of the four doors, depending on the of the front doors, or by opening one
vehicle. The light only goes out when of the four doors, depending on the
the doors are correctly closed; vehicle. The light only goes out when
– no lighting. the doors are correctly closed;
– no lighting.

3.18
INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)

Glovebox light 3 Boot light 4

Light 3 comes on when the cover is The light 4 comes on when the boot is
opened. opened.
Automatic operation of interior
lighting
(depending on vehicle)
– if the doors are unlocked using
the remote control, the lighting
is switched on for approximately
30 seconds.
– If a door is open (or not properly
closed), the lighting is switched
on for approximately 3 to 30 mi-
nutes.
– if all the doors are closed, the
lighting start to dim when the ig-
nition is switched on.

3.19
SUN VISOR, GRAB HANDLE

1 2 3 2 4 5

Sun visor 1 and 3 Courtesy mirrors 2 Grab handle 5

Lower the sun visor 1 or 3 over the Depending on the vehicle, the sun This offers support and can be held
windscreen or unclip it and turn it over visors are fitted with a courtesy mirror. when the vehicle is being driven.
the side window. Lift the cover 4. Do not use these for getting into or out
of the vehicle.

3.20
ASHTRAYS, CIGARETTE LIGHTER, ACCESSORIES SOCKET (1/2)

1
4
2
3

Cigarette lighter 1 Ashtray

With the ignition on, push in cigar It can be housed in either position 3
lighter 1. or 4.
It will spring back with a click when it is Lift the cover 2 to open.
ready. Pull it out to use. After use, re- Remove the ashtray to empty it.
place it without pushing it all the way in.

If your vehicle is not fitted with a

cigar lighter and an ashtray, these
can be obtained from an approved
Dealer.

3.21
ASHTRAYS, CIGARETTE LIGHTER, ACCESSORIES SOCKET (2/2)

Accessories sockets 5 and 6

The sockets are provided to connect
accessories approved by our Technical
Department.

Connect accessories
with a maximum power of
120 Watts (12 V) only.
When several accessory
sockets are used at the same time,
the total power of the connected
accessories must not exceed
180 watts.
Fire hazard.

3.22
REAR HEADRESTS (1/2)

A A A

B
A A A A
A
A

1
1

Five-seater version To put the headrest back in place A

Insert the rods in the holes, press
Position for using headrest A button 1, lower the headrest and check
Lift the headrest fully until it locks. that it is securely in place.
Check that the bonnet is correctly Headrest storage position A
locked.
Press the button 1 and lower the head-
To raise the headrest A rest completely.
Raise the headrest as far as it will go, The lowest position of the headrest
then press button 1 and remove the (position B) is a position for storage
headrest. only: do not set it in this position when
the seat is occupied.
The headrest is a safety
component; check that it is
fitted and in the correct po-
sition.

3.23
REAR HEADRESTS (2/2)

B
B
C

Four-seater version The lowest position of the headrest

(position B) is a position for storage
This version differs in that it has rear only: do not set it in this position when
seatbelts and headrests on the rear the seat is occupied.
side seats only.
The C label informs you that it is pro-
hibited to seat passengers in areas
other than the seats provided.

The headrest is a safety

component; check that it is
fitted and in the correct po-
sition.

3.24
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (1/5)

1 2

Front door storage Dashboard storage 2 Central storage

compartments 1 compartment 3

Ensure that no hard, heavy

Nothing should be placed or pointed objects are
on the floor area in front of placed in the “open” storage
the driver as such objects compartments in such a
may slide under the pedal way that they may fall onto passen-
during braking manoeuvres, thus gers during sudden turning, braking
obstructing its use. or in the event of an accident.

3.25
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (2/5)

6
4 6
5

Centre console storage Central storage

compartment 4 compartment 5
(or radio location)
Place for cups or ashtray 6

Ensure that no hard, heavy

or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage
compartments in such a
way that they may fall onto passen-
gers during sudden turning, braking
or in the event of an accident.

3.26
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (3/5)

9
8 10

Central storage Central storage Cup holders 10

compartment 8 compartment 9 This can be used for storing a mobile
With the sliding armrest 7 in its rear- ashtray, cup holder, etc.
most position, raise it.

When cornering, accelerat-

ing or braking, ensure that
the cup does not spill.
There is a risk of burns if
hot liquid leaks.

3.27
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (4/5)

11

13

14
12

Dashboard upper storage This glove box can be used to store A4 Storage drawer under
compartment 11 format documents. passenger seat 14
Inside the cover, section 13 has been
provided for pens, maps, etc.
Passenger side glove box
Pull handle 12 to open it.

Nothing should be placed on the floor area in front of the driver as such
objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus ob-
structing its use.

3.28
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (5/5)

16

15

Rear door storage Front seat storage pockets 16

compartment 15

Ensure that no hard, heavy

or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage
compartments in such a
way that they may fall onto passen-
gers during sudden turning, braking
or in the event of an accident.

3.29
REAR BENCH SEAT (1/3)

A 2
B
A
B 2
When refitting the seat-
back, make sure it is cor-
rectly locked in place.
1 If seat covers are fitted,
make sure these do not prevent the
seatback latch from locking in.
Make sure that the seat belts are
positioned correctly.
Five-seater version To reposition the seat back A or B
Reposition the headrests.
– Lift the seat back;
To fold the back A or B – make sure you lock the seat back in
– Insert the seat belt buckle of the rear place.
seat in its housing 1;
– remove or fully lower the headrests
(please see the information on “Rear
headrests” in Section 3);
– lower handle 2;
– lower the seat back.
When moving the rear
Check that the rear seat bench seat, ensure that
belts are positioned and nothing obstructs the an-
operating correctly each chorage points (part of the
For safety reasons, carry time the rear bench seat is body, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
out any adjustments when moved.
the vehicle is not being
driven.

3.30
REAR BENCH SEAT (2/3)
The system automatically regulates the
seat temperature. When activated, it
will determine if the seat heating is nec-
essary or not.

C
B 3

To fold-down the seat C Heated seats

(depending on vehicle) (depending on vehicle)
Ensure that the front seats are far Side seats only
enough forward. With the ignition on:
Tilt seat base C against the front seats. – pressing the switch 3 on the required
seat for the first time activates the
To fold-down/reposition the heating system on high. Both inte-
seatback A or B grated switch warning lights come
Proceed as described above. on;
– pressing the switch for the second
time changes the heating to low. One
integrated warning light comes on; Check that the rear seat
belts are positioned and
– pressing for the third time turns the operating correctly each
heating off. time the rear bench seat is
moved.

3.31
REAR BENCH SEAT (3/3)

Four-seater version
This version differs in that it has rear
seatbelts and headrests on the rear
side seats only.
The D label informs you that it is pro-
hibited to seat passengers in areas
other than the seats provided.

Check that the rear seat

belts are positioned and
operating correctly each
time the rear bench seat is
moved.

3.32
TAILGATE

To open Electric central locking

Press button 1 and lift the tailgate. The tailgate is locked and unlocked at
the same time as the doors.
To close Once you have lowered the tailgate
to shoulder height, release the interior
Lower the tailgate using handles 2 handle and finish closing the tailgate by
inside the tailgate to help you. pressing down on the tailgate from the
outside.
The attaching of any carry-
ing device (bike rack, lug-
gage box, etc.) resting on
the luggage compartment
lid is prohibited. To install a carrying
device on your vehicle, contact an
Approved Dealer.

3.33
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE BOOT (1/2)

Always position the objects transported so

that the largest surface is against:

A
– the rear bench seatbacks, for normal
loads (example: A);

– the front seatbacks with the rear seat- B

backs folded down, as is the case for
maximum loads (example B).

Ensure that the objects being transported

are evenly distributed throughout the load-
ing area.
If you have to place objects on the folded
seatback, it is necessary that you lower
the headrests before folding the seatback
so that it can be folded as flat as possible
against the seat.

3.34
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE BOOT (2/2)

1
1

Always position the heavi-

est items directly on the
floor. Use the lashing
points 1 on the boot floor,
if these are fitted to the vehicle. The
luggage should be loaded in such a
way that no items will be thrown for-
ward and strike the occupants if the
driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten
the rear seat belts, even if the seats
are not occupied.

3.35
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towing, attachments

Permissible nose weight, maxi-

mum permissible towing weight
braked and unbraked :
Refer to the information on “Weights”
in Section 6.
Choice and fitting of towing
equipment Maximum dimension A = 955 mm
Maximum weight of towing equip-
ment: 25 kg.
It is not permitted to fit a mechanical
towing device (ball, hook, etc.) that
is removable without tools or retract- Any towing device must not ob-
able if it cannot be easily removed struct any lighting component or
or repositioned when not in use. the number plate when not in use.
Mechanical towing devices (ball,
For information on how to fit the
hook, etc.) which can be removed
towing equipment and the condi-
without tools or which are retract-
tions of use, refer to the fitting in-
able must be removed or reposi-
structions.
tioned when they are not in use.
Please keep these instructions with
In all cases, you must comply with
the rest of the vehicle documenta-
the regulations of the particular
tion.
country you are in.

3.36
REAR PARCEL SHELF

1
2
2

Removal Lift the parcel shelf 2 to half height and Gently lift the parcel shelf 2 and pull it
unclip the mountings 3 located on each towards you, holding it at each end.
Unhook the two cords 1 from the boot side of the parcel shelf.
door. To refit, proceed in the reverse order to
removal.
The parcel shelf 2 is made up of two
rigid sections.

Do not place any heavy or

solid objects on the parcel
shelf.
These may pose a risk to
the vehicle occupants if the driver
has to brake suddenly or if the vehi-
cle is involved in an accident.

3.37
ROOF BARS, SPOILER (1/4)

4
1 2 4 2 3

A A
B

2 3 2
5

Modular roof bars – raise the bars 3 and 4 and fit them
in transverse position 5. To do this,
If the vehicle is equipped, this device place the bar 3 (movement B) in the
enables you to position the roof bars front position, then place the bar 4
in either longitudinal or transverse po- (movement C) in the rear position.
sition.
Note: make sure that bars 3 and 4 are Maximum permissible load on
To place the bars in the transverse correctly positioned. roof rack: refer to the information
position: on “Weights” in Section 6.
– unclip the rotary covers 1 and put
them in the vertical position (move-
ment A);
– loosen the bolts 2 using the torque It is forbidden to attach any
wrench 6 (see following pages) lo- carrying device on the roof
cated in the glove box; for vehicles not originally
fitted with longitudinal or
modular roof bars.

3.38
ROOF BARS, SPOILER (2/4)

6 6
D D

2
E E 8
7

8
– use the 6 tool to tighten the bolts 2:
marks D and E located on the tool
should be out-of-synch (mark 7);
– tighten the bolts 2 as far as possible
using the tool 6 until marks D and E
located on the tool 6 are parallel
(mark 8);
It is strictly forbidden to place the
– re-clip the rotary covers 1. roof bars in the transverse position
Note: bars 3 and 4 are not interchange- (carrying position) when entering a
able. roller-type car wash.

Make sure that the two Roof bars in the transverse

modular roof bars are cor- position
rectly position and locked.
The maximum speed must be lim-
ited to 80 mph (130 km/h).

3.39
ROOF BARS, SPOILER (3/4)

When not using the bars in trans-

verse position, refit the bars in lon-
gitudinal position in order to opti-
mise fuel consumption and avoid air
noise.

In the event of loss, contact an ap-

proved dealer to obtain the bolts 2
and tool 6.

The modular roof bars are

originally assembled and
approved by our Technical
Department.
They are supplied with bolts 2 and Check that the objects and/
tool 6. These must only be used for or accessories (bike rack,
attaching the roof bars to the vehi- roof box etc.) fitted to the
cle. modular roof bars are cor-
rectly positioned, evenly distributed
and secured.

3.40
ROOF BARS, SPOILER (4/4)

9 For information on the range of

equipment adapted to your vehi- F
cle, we advise you to consult an ap-
proved Dealer. Refer to the manu-
facturer’s instructions for information
on how to fit and operate the equip-
ment.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documenta-
tion.
Maximum permissible load on
roof rack: refer to the information
Longitudinal roof bars on “Weights” in Section 6. Spoiler F
If fitted on the vehicle, you can trans-
port luggage or additional equipment
(bike racks, ski racks, etc):
– on a roof rack;
– on transverse roof bars which must
in turn be attached to roof bars fitted
lengthways 9;
It is prohibited to attach any
– directly onto the longitudinal roof carrying equipment (bike
bars. rack, luggage box etc.)
It is forbidden to attach any resting against the spoiler
carrying device on the roof or tailgate. To install a carrying
for vehicles not originally device on your vehicle, contact an
fitted with longitudinal or Approved Dealer.
modular roof bars.

3.41
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (1/3)

A
Multimedia socket 2
B
You can use the USB socket to access
the multimedia content of your acces-
1 sories and to update the system. 1
The various sources can be selected
using the multimedia screen or the
radio and the steering column controls.
The sockets USB can also be used to
recharge accessories with a maximum
power rating of 12 Watts (5 Volts) per
socket, which have been approved by
our Technical Department. 4
4 3 2 3

Multimedia system A or B Charging connection 3

The presence and location of this The USB sockets can be used to re-
equipment depends on the vehicle’s charge accessories with a maximum
multimedia equipment. power rating of 12 Watts (5 Volts) per
1 Multimedia screen; socket, which have been approved by
2 Multimedia socket; our Technical Department.
3 Charging socket;
4 Steering column controls.

Connect accessories with a

maximum power of 12 watts
only.
Please refer to the instruction
manual for details of how it works. Fire hazard.

3.42
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (2/3)

Hands-free telephone
integrated control
Use the microphone 5 or, depending on
the vehicle, 6 and the steering column
control 4.

Using the telephone

We remind you of the need
to conform to the legislation
in force concerning the use
of such equipment.

3.43
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (3/3)

Rear sockets 7 Radio 8

USB sockets only allow the recharging
of accessories approved by the brand's
Technical Services for which the power
must not exceed 12 watts (5 volts) per
outlet.

Connect accessories with a

maximum power of 12 watts
only.
Fire hazard.
Please refer to the multimedia in-
structions for further information.

3.44
 Section 4: Maintenance

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Engine oil level: general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Engine oil level: topping up, filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Bodywork maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
Interior trim maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
4.1
BONNET (1/2)

When working in the engine

compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.

1
2

Never activate the remote

To open, pull the handle 1 or, depend- engine start-up function
ing on the vehicle, the 2 stalk. or its programming before
opening the bonnet or when
it is open.
Before performing any
action in the engine com- Risk of burns or serious injury.
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop- Please note when work-
ping the engine” in Section 2). ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start

Deactivate the Stop and

at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
Start function for any opera- minds you of this. Do not press down on the
tion performed in the engine Risk of injury. bonnet: there is a risk that
compartment. the bonnet may accidentally
close.

4.2
BONNET (2/2)
3

3
6
6
4 8
7

5
5

Unlocking the bonnet catch Closing the bonnet

To unlock, raise the bonnet slightly and Check that nothing has been left in the Make sure nothing is left
release hook 3 by pushing tab 5 to the engine compartment. in the engine compartment
left. Depending on the vehicle, to close (cloth, tools, etc.).
the bonnet, replace the stay 6 in its
Otherwise, this may lead to
holder 7. Hold the middle of the bonnet
engine damage or cause a fire.
Opening the bonnet and guide it down to one foot (30 cm)
above the closed position, then re-
Lift the bonnet, guiding it up, and it
lease. It will latch automatically under
will rest in position with the help of two
its own weight.
struts 4.
Depending on the vehicle, lift the bonnet
and release the stay 6 from its holder 7. In the event of even a slight
For your own safety, it is very impor- Ensure that the bonnet is impact involving the radi-
tant to fix the stay into the retainer 8 in properly locked. Check that ator grille or bonnet, have
the bonnet. nothing is preventing the the bonnet lock checked by
catch from locking (gravel, an approved Dealer as soon as pos-
cloth, etc.). sible.

4.3
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information (1/2)
It is normal for an engine to use oil for
lubrication and cooling of moving parts
and it is normal to top up the level be-
tween oil changes.
However, contact your approved
Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being
consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km)
after the running in period.
Oil change frequency: check the oil
level from time to time and certainly
before any long journey to avoid the
risk of damaging your engine.

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-
tion performed in the engine
compartment.

Adding engine oil

Use a funnel or protect the
filling neck area to avoid
engine oil escaping onto a
hot part of the engine compartment
or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical Before performing any
components). action in the engine com-
Fire hazard. partment, the ignition must
If there is an abnormal or repeated be switched off (please see
drop in the fluid level, please consult the information on “Starting, stop-
an authorised dealer. ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.4
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information (2/2)
– remove the dipstick and wipe with a
B clean, lint-free cloth;

A – push the dipstick in as far as it will

go (for vehicles equipped with a cap-
type dipstick C, screw the cap in as
far as it will go);
C
– take out the dipstick again;
– read the level: it should never fall
B below minimum mark A or exceed
maximum mark B.
A
Once the operation has been com-
pleted, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
Reading the oil level
The oil level should be read with the ve-
hicle on level ground, after the engine
has been switched off for some time.
The dipstick must be used to read Exceeding the maximum
the exact oil level and make sure engine oil level
that the maximum level has not been Under no circumstances
exceeded (risk of engine damage). should maximum filling
Refer to the following pages. level B be exceeded: this could
Depending on the vehicle, the instru- damage the engine and the anti-pol-
ment panel display only alerts the driver lution system.
when the oil level is at its minimum. If the oil level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle.
Contact an authorised dealer.

4.5
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/4)

Do not exceed the MAX level and

do not forget to refit dipstick 2 and
cap 1.

2 1
1

2 Before performing any

action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
Topping up/filling – Unscrew cap 1;
– top up the level (as a guide, the ca-
The vehicle must be parked on level pacity between the minimum and
ground and the engine should be cold maximum reading on dipstick 2 is
(for instance, before the engine is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depending
started up for the first time in the day). on the engine); Exceeding the maximum
– wait approximately 10 minutes to engine
allow the oil to flow into the engine; oil level
Please note when work- – check the level using the dipstick 2
ing close to the engine that Under no circumstances
(as described above). should the maximum filling level be
it may be hot. The engine Once the operation has been com-
cooling fan may also start exceeded: this could damage the
pleted, ensure that the dipstick is engine and the emission control
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
system.
screwed in. If the oil level exceeds the maximum
minds you of this. level, do not start your vehicle.
Risk of injury. Contact an authorised dealer.

4.6
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/4)

1
1

2 2

Do not exceed the MAX level and Adding engine oil

do not forget to refit dipstick 2 and Use a funnel or protect the
cap 1. filling neck area to avoid
engine oil escaping onto a
hot part of the engine compartment
or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical
components).
Deactivate the Stop and Never run the engine in an
Start function for any opera- Fire hazard. enclosed space as exhaust
tion performed in the engine gases are poisonous.
compartment.

4.7
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (3/4)

1
1 2

Refilling the oil or check-

ing the oil level: be careful
If there is an abnormal or repeated when topping up or check-
drop in the fluid level, please consult ing the level of the oil, make
an authorised dealer. sure that no oil drips onto the engine
components. Do not forget to prop-
erly close the cap and refit the dip-
stick to prevent any oil spatter on Engine oil change: if you
hot engine components. are changing the oil when
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that Fire hazard. the engine is hot, be careful
the windscreen wiper stalk not to scald yourself if the
is in the park position. oil overflows.

Risk of injury.

4.8
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (4/4)
Oil change Resetting the alert after an oil Please note when work-
Service interval: refer to the change ing close to the engine that
Maintenance Document for your vehi- (depending on the vehicle) it may be hot. The engine
cle. If you change the oil yourself, you will cooling fan may also start
need to reset the oil change warning.
Oil change capacity To do this, after switching on the igni- at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
tion, for ten seconds you must:
Please refer to the maintenance docu- – Depress the accelerator pedal fully, minds you of this.
ment for your vehicle, or contact an au- – with your foot on the accelerator, de- Risk of injury.
thorised dealer. press the brake pedal three times in
Always check the engine oil level using succession.
the dipstick, as explained previously (it
should never fall below the minimum Reinitialisation is complete when the
level, or be over the maximum level on
the dipstick).
À indicator light goes out. If this is
not the case, repeat the operation.
Special case: if you change the oil
Engine oil grade before the engine oil change exceeded
Refer to the Maintenance Document for warning is displayed, it is also neces-
your vehicle. sary to reset the warning. In this case, Exceeding the maximum
engine
the À warning light comes on
for approximately 5 seconds to confirm
oil level
the reset. Under no circumstances
should the maximum filling level be
exceeded: this could damage the
engine and the emission control
system.
If the oil level exceeds the maximum
Deactivate the Stop and Never run the engine in an level, do not start your vehicle.
Start function for any opera- enclosed space as exhaust Contact an authorised dealer.
tion performed in the engine gases are poisonous.
compartment.

4.9
LEVELS (1/3)
Level Topping up
It is normal for the level to drop as the After any operation on the hydraulic cir-
brake shoes become worn, but it must cuit, a specialist must replace the fluid.
never drop lower than the “MINI” warn- Only use fluids approved by our
ing line shown on brake fluid reser- Technical Department (and taken from
voir 1. a sealed container).
If you wish to check the disc and drum
wear yourself, you should obtain the Replacement intervals
1 document explaining the checking pro- Refer to the Maintenance Document for
cedure from the manufacturer’s net- your vehicle.
work or web site.

 Brake fluid
This should be checked frequently,
and immediately if you notice even the
slightest loss in braking efficiency. If there is an abnormal or repeated
The level should be read with the engine drop in the fluid level, please consult
switched off and on level ground. an authorised dealer.
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start

Deactivate the Stop and

at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
Start function for any opera- minds you of this. partment, the ignition must
tion performed in the engine be switched off (please see
Risk of injury. the information on “Starting, stop-
compartment.
ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.10
LEVELS (2/3)
Coolant level checking frequency
Check the coolant level regularly
(very severe damage is likely to be
caused to the engine if it runs out of
coolant).
If the level needs to be topped up, only
2 use products approved by our Technical
Department which ensure:
– protection against freezing;
– anticorrosion protection of the cool-
ing system.

Replacement intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle. If there is an abnormal or repeated
drop in the fluid level, please consult
an authorised dealer.
 Coolant
With the engine switched off and on
level ground, the level when cold must
be between the MINI and MAXI marks
on reservoir 2.
Top this level up when cold before it Please note when work-
reaches the MINI mark. ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start

No operations should be
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
carried out on the cooling minds you of this.
circuit when the engine is
Risk of injury.
hot.
Risk of burns.

4.11
LEVELS (3/3)
Jets: to adjust the angle of the jets,
pivot the little ball using a pin.
Note: do not use pure water (risk of
3 damage to the priming pump, limescale
building up on the pump and the jets).

 Windscreen washer
reservoir
Filling: With the engine switched off,
open the cap 3, fill until you can see the
fluid, then refit the cap. Please note when work-
This reservoir supplies the front and ing close to the engine that
rear screen washers. it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
Liquid: Special windscreen washer
fluid (use an anti-freeze product in
winter).
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
Use products recommended by an au- minds you of this.
thorised dealer. Risk of injury.

4.12
FILTERS
The replacement of filter elements (air
filter, passenger compartment filter,
diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the
maintenance operations for your vehi-
cle.
Replacement intervals for filter el-
ements: refer to the Maintenance
Document for your vehicle.

Passenger compartment filter

If your vehicle is not originally fitted with
a passenger compartment filter, it is When working in the engine
possible to have one retrofitted. compartment, ensure that
Contact an approved dealer. the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.

Please note when work-

ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start

Deactivate the Stop and

at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
Start function for any opera- minds you of this.
tion performed in the engine
Risk of injury.
compartment.

4.13
TYRE PRESSURE (1/2)
Tyre safety and the use of chains:
please refer to the “Tyres” paragraph in
Section 5 for information on servicing
conditions and, depending on the ver-
sion, the use of chains.

Label A The presence and location of the infor-

mation on the label depends on the ve-
To read it, open the driver’s door. Tyre hicle.
pressures should be checked when the
tyres are cold. B: dimension of the tyres fitted to the Special note for ful-
vehicle. ly-loaded vehicles (max-
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked imum authorised all-up
when the tyres are cold, increase the C: intended driving speed.
weight) towing a trailer:
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI). D: tyre pressures for the front wheels. the maximum speed must be lim-
Never deflate a hot tyre. ited to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the
E: tyre pressures for the rear wheels.
tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar
F: dimensions of the emergency spare (3 psi).
wheel tyre.
Refer to the information on “Weights”
G: tyre pressure for the emergency in Section 6.
spare wheel.
Risk of tyre blowouts.

4.14
TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
loss warning system
If under-inflated (puncture, low pres-

sure, etc.), the warning light on
the instrument panel comes on. See
“Tyre pressure loss warning” paragraph
in chapter 2.

For your safety, please re-

spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca-
pacity and speed rating at least
equal to those of the original
tyres, or conform to those recom-
mended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-
ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve-
hicle.

4.15
BATTERY (1/2)
The charge status of your battery can
decrease especially if you use your ve-
hicle:
– for short journeys;
– for driving in town;
– when the temperature drops;
1 – after extended use of consumers
(radio etc.) with the engine switched
off.

Battery 1 does not require any mainte-

nance. You should not open it or add
any fluid.

Handle the battery with care

as it contains sulphuric acid,
which must not come into
contact with eyes or skin. If
it does, wash the affected area with
plenty of cold water and consult a
doctor, if necessary.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot Before performing any
objects and sparks do not come into Deactivate the Stop and action in the engine com-
contact with the battery as there is a Start function for any opera- partment, the ignition must
risk of explosion. tion performed in the engine be switched off (please see
compartment. the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.16
BATTERY (2/2)
Replacing the battery
A 2 3 4
For your own safety and for
the proper operation of the
vehicle’s electrical equip-
ment (lights, windscreen
wipers, ABS, etc.), any intervention
on the battery (removal, disconnec-
A tion, etc.) must categorically be per-
formed by a specialist professional.
Risk of serious burns from elec-
7 6 5 tric shocks.
You must respect the replacement
intervals (without exceeding them)
Label A as stated in the maintenance doc-
Observe the indications on the battery: ument.
– 2 Naked flames and smoking forbid- The battery is a specific type.
den; Please ensure it is replaced with the
same type.
– 3 Wear eye protection;
Call an approved Dealer.
– 4 Keep away from children;
Please note when work-
– 5 Explosive substances;
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine – 6 Refer to the handbook;
cooling fan may also start – 7 Corrosive substances.
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.

4.17
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/3)
A well-maintained vehicle will last You should Respect local regulations about wash-
longer. It is therefore recommended to ing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your ve-
maintain the exterior of the vehicle reg- Wash your car frequently, with the hicle on a public highway).
ularly. engine off, with cleaning products rec-
ommended by the manufacturer (never Observe the vehicle stopping distances
Your vehicle has been treated with very use abrasive products). Rinse thor- when driving on gravelled surfaces to
effective anti-corrosion products. It is oughly beforehand with a jet: prevent paint damage.
nevertheless subject to various outside – spots of tree resin and industrial Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas
influences. grime; where the paint has been damaged, to
– mud in the wheel arches and under- prevent corrosion spreading.
Corrosive agents in the atmosphere neath the body which forms damp
– atmospheric pollution (built-up and patches; Remember to visit the body shop pe-
industrial areas); – bird droppings, which cause a riodically in order to maintain your an-
– saline atmospheres (near the sea, chemical reaction with the paint that ti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the
particularly in hot weather); rapidly discolours paintwork and Maintenance Document.
– seasonal and damp weather condi- may even cause the paint to peel If it is necessary to clean mechani-
tions (e.g. road salt in winter, water off; cal components, hinges, etc., spray
from road cleaners, etc.). wash the vehicle immediately to them with products approved by our
remove these marks since it is im- Technical Department to protect them
Minor impacts possible to remove them by polish- after they have been cleaned.
Abrasive action ing;
Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit – salt, particularly in the wheel arches
thrown up by other vehicles, etc. and underneath the body after driv-
ing in areas where the roads have
You should take a number of minor pre- been gritted.
cautions in order to safeguard your ve-
hicle against such risks. Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves,
etc.) from the vehicle regularly.

We have selected special products

to care for your vehicle and you can
obtain these from the manufactur-
er’s accessory outlets.

4.18
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/3)
What you should not do
Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or
freezing temperatures. Degrease or clean using
high-pressure cleaning
Do not scrape off mud or dirt without equipment or by spray-
pre-wetting. ing on products not ap-
Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior. proved by our Technical
Allow rust to form following minor im- Department:
pacts. – mechanical components (e.g.:
engine compartment);
Do not use solvents not approved by
our Technical Department to remove – the wheels (e.g. braking system
stains as this could damage the paint- components such as brake calli-
work. pers);

Do not drive in snow or muddy condi- – underbody;

tions without washing the vehicle, par- – parts with hinges (e.g.: inside the
ticularly under the wheel arches and doors);
body.
– painted plastic external fittings (e.g.:
bumpers).
Doing this could give rise to corrosion
or operational faults.

4.19
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (3/3)
Vehicles with a matte paint Cleaning stickers, decorative Using a roller type car wash
finish films, etc. Return the windscreen wiper stalk to
This type of paint requires certain pre- the Park position (refer to the informa-
You should do the following tion on the “Windscreen washer, wiper”
cautions.
Use a soft cloth or cotton wool. in Section 1). Check the mounting of
You should do the following external accessories, additional lights
Moisten it with soapy water, then
and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper
Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty always wipe clean with a soft cloth or
blades are secured with adhesive tape.
of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle cotton wool.
sponge. Remove the radio aerial mast if your
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
vehicle is fitted with this equipment.
Do not do the following cloth.
Remember to remove the tape and refit
Use wax-based products (polishing). Do not do the following the antenna after washing.
Rub too hard. Use alcohol-based cleaning products.
Wash the vehicle in a roller-type car
wash. Use utensils (e.g. scraper). Cleaning the headlights,
Attach stickers to the paintwork (risk of Rub too hard. sensors and cameras
leaving marks). Use a soft cloth or cotton wool.
If this does not clean them properly,
moisten the cloth with soapy water,
Wash the vehicle then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth
using a high-pressure or cotton wool.
cleaning device. Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
Wash the area using a cloth.
high-pressure clean-
ing device. Do not use alcohol-based cleaning
products or utensils such as scrap-
ers.

4.20
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)
A well-maintained vehicle will last Glass instrument panel Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)
longer. It is therefore recommended to (e.g. instrument panel, clock, exterior
maintain the interior of the vehicle reg- Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.
temperature display etc.)
ularly. Liquid stain
Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).
A stain should always be dealt with If this does not clean them properly, Use soapy water.
swiftly. use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly
moistened with soapy water and then Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth,
Whatever type of stain is on the trim, rinse and remove the excess.
use cold (or tepid) soapy water with wipe clean with another soft damp cloth
natural soap. or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry Solid or pasty stain
Detergents (washing-up liquid, pow- cloth. Carefully remove the excess solid or
dered products, alcohol-based prod- pasty material immediately using a
ucts) should not be used. Do not use products containing alco-
hol and/or spray fluids on the area. spatula (working from the edges to the
Use a soft cloth. centre to avoid spreading the stain).
In the case of a liquid stain, clean as
Rinse and wipe up excess water.
Seat belts indicated.
They must remain clean. Special instructions for sweets or
Multimedia screen Use products selected by our Technical chewing gum
Maintenance of the screen may depend Department (approved outlets) or
on the type of multimedia equipment. warm, soapy water and a sponge and Fit an ice cube on the stain to solidify it,
Please refer to the multimedia instruc- wipe with a dry cloth. then proceed as for a solid stain.
tions for further information. Detergents or dyes must not be used
under any circumstances.

For further recommendations for

maintaining the interior, and/or for
any unsatisfactory results, please
see an authorised dealer.

4.21
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)
Removal/replacing removable You should not:
equipment originally fitted in Position objects such as deodorants,
the vehicle scents etc. near air vents as this could
If you need to remove equipment in damage your dashboard trim.
order to clean the passenger com-
partment (for example, mats), always
ensure that they are correctly refitted
and are the right way around (the driv-
er’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s Using high-pressure
side, etc.) and fit them with the compo- cleaning equipment or
nents supplied with the equipment (for sprays inside the pas-
example, the driver mat should always senger compartment:
be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting
components). without careful use, this equipment
could impair the correct functioning
With the vehicle stationary, always of the electrical or electronic compo-
ensure that nothing will impede driving nents in the vehicle, or have other
(anything obstructing the pedals, heel detrimental effects.
wedged by the mat etc.).

4.22
 Section 5: Practical advice

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Puncture, Emergency spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Tyre inflation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Wheel trim, Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Front lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Side indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
Battery: troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37
Radio frequency remote control: batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40
“Hands-free” card: battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.42
Wipers (replacing blades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44
Towing: breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45
Fitting a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.49
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.50
Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.51
5.1
TOOLS

2 3
4

1
A
5 4
5 3

Accessing the tools Jack 4 Wheelbrace 5

The presence of the various tools de- To use the jack, undo nut 2. When refit- This is used to tighten/loosen the wheel
pends on the vehicle. ting, fold the jack before placing it in its bolts and, depending on the vehicle, to
housing. access the emergency spare wheel.
The tools are located in the luggage Tighten the nut to secure the jack.
compartment. Hubcap tool 3
Unclip the flap A by placing your hand This tool is used to remove the wheel
in the handle 1. Remove the flap. trims.

After the using the tools, make sure you

close the flap A. properly.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come
loose under braking. After use, make sure the tools are correctly posi-
tioned in their housings: risk of injury.
The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no cir-
cumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs underneath the vehicle or
to gain access to the underside of the vehicle.

5.2
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (1/3)
In case of puncture – remove the emergency spare
wheel 3.
Depending on the vehicle, a tyre infla-
tion kit or emergency spare wheel is
C To store the wheel 3 in the cage
provided (refer to the following pages). – Place the punctured tyre in the sub-
A 1 frame 4;
– to return the holder 4 to its initial po-
4 sition, proceed in reverse order and
tighten the bolt using the wheel-
5 2 brace 1 to refit the assembly;
– make sure it is correctly locked.
B
3
4
Emergency spare wheel 4x2
version (2WD)
Do not touch the exhaust, (depending on the vehicle)
risk of burns. This is located in the cradle 4 under the
vehicle C or in the boot D. Do not leave the tools un-
To take out the spare wheel 3: secured inside the vehicle
as they may come loose
If the vehicle is parked on – Open the tailgate; under braking. After use,
the hard shoulder, you must – undo bolt 2 using wheelbrace 1 make sure the tools are correctly
warn other road users of (refer to the information on “Tools” in positioned in their housings: risk of
your vehicle’s presence this section); injury.
with a warning triangle or with other – detach the holder 4 (example A) or The jack is designed for wheel
devices as per the legislation apply- depending on the vehicle, detach the changing purposes only. Under no
ing to the country you are in. holder 4 using the handle 5 (exam- circumstances should it be used for
ple B); carrying out repairs underneath the
vehicle or to gain access to the un-
derside of the vehicle.

5.3
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (2/3)
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
loss warning system
6
If under-inflated (puncture, low pressure
etc.), the warning light lights up
on the instrument panel; please refer to
7 “Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
9 8 Section 2.
9

To take out the spare wheel 9:

– Open the boot lid;
– fold the luggage compartment mat 6;
– depending on the vehicle, remove
Do not leave the tools un-
the part 7;
secured inside the vehicle
– unscrew the central mounting 8; as they may come loose
– remove the emergency spare under braking. After use,
wheel 9. make sure the tools are correctly
positioned in their housings: risk of
Note: ensure that the emergency spare injury.
wheel or punctured wheel and the The jack is designed for wheel
wheel tray are correctly positioned so changing purposes only. Under no
that the luggage compartment carpet circumstances should it be used for
can be properly fitted. carrying out repairs underneath the
vehicle or to gain access to the un-
derside of the vehicle.

5.4
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (3/3)

10

11
12

Emergency spare wheel 4x4 If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it
version (4WD) checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.
This is located in the luggage compart-
ment. Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel which is different to
the other four wheels:
To access it: – Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.
– Open the boot lid; – Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel identi-
cal to the original one.
– fold the luggage compartment – When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the
mat 10; driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.
– unscrew the central mounting 11; – Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cor-
– remove the emergency spare
nering.
wheel 12.
– If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle
Note: ensure that the emergency spare and check the tyre pressure.
wheel or punctured wheel and the
wheel tray are correctly positioned so
that the luggage compartment carpet
can be properly fitted.

5.5
TYRE INFLATION KIT (1/4)

B The kit is only approved

for inflating the tyres of the
vehicle initially fitted with the
Do not attempt to use the kit. It must never be used to
inflation kit if the tyre has inflate the tyres of another vehicle,
A been damaged as a result or any other inflatable object (rubber
of driving with a puncture. ring, rubber boat, etc.).
You should therefore carefully check Avoid spillage on skin when han-
the condition of the tyre sidewalls dling the repair product bottle. If
before any operation. droplets do leak out, rinse them off
Driving with underinflated, flat or with plenty of water.
punctured tyres can be dangerous Keep the repair kit away from chil-
and may make the tyre impossible dren.
to repair.
Do not dispose of the empty bottle
This repair is temporary in the countryside. Return it to your
The kit repairs tyres when
tread A has been dam- A tyre which has been punctured approved dealer or to a recycling or-
aged by objects smaller should always be inspected (and re- ganisation.
than 4 mm. It cannot repair paired, where possible) as soon as The bottle has a limited service
all types of puncture, such as cuts possible by a specialist. life which is indicated on its label.
larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre When taking a tyre which has been Check the expiry date.
sidewall B. repaired using this kit to be replaced, Contact an approved dealer to re-
Ensure also that the wheel rim is in you must inform the specialist. place the inflation tube and repair
good condition. When driving, vibration may be felt product bottle.
Do not pull out the foreign body due to the presence of the repair
causing the puncture if it is still in product injected into the tyre.
the tyre.

5.6
TYRE INFLATION KIT (2/4)
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
loss warning system
If under-inflated (puncture, low pres-
sure, etc.), the warning light 
lights up on the instrument panel.
See “Tyre pressure loss warning” in
Section 2.
C
C

2
1 D

In the event of a puncture, use the kit C On 4x2 versions, unclip flap D.
located in the luggage compartment in
the 4x2 version or in the emergency
spare wheel tray under the luggage
compartment carpet in the 4x4 version.
The image may not be contractual with
the kit supplied with the vehicle.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
Before using this kit, park the vehicle at a sufficient distance from traffic, ing to the country you are in.
switch on the hazard warning lights, apply the handbrake, ask all passen-
gers to leave the vehicle and keep them away from traffic.

5.7
TYRE INFLATION KIT (3/4)
Engine running, handbrake applied, If a minimum pressure of 1.8 bar
– Disconnect any accessories previ- cannot be obtained after 15 minutes,
ously connected to the vehicle’s ac- repair is impossible. Do not drive the
cessories sockets; vehicle. Consult an approved dealer.

– refer to the information on the in-

flation kit compressor located in
the boot of the vehicle and follow the
instructions;
– inflate the tyre to the recommended
pressure (please refer to the infor-
mation in the “Tyre pressures” sec-
tion);
– after a maximum of 15 minutes, stop
inflating and read the pressure (on
pressure gauge 1);
Note: while the bottle is emptying
(approximately 30 seconds), the
pressure gauge 1 will indicate briefly
a pressure of up to 6 bars, then the
pressure drops.
– Adjust the pressure: to increase
it, continue inflation with the kit. To
reduce it, press the button 2.
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or missing
valve cap can make the
Nothing should be placed tyres less airtight and lead
around the driver’s feet to pressure loss. Always use valve
as such objects may slide caps identical to the original ones
under the pedals during and ensure they are tightly screwed
sudden braking manoeuvres and on.
obstruct their use.

5.8
TYRE INFLATION KIT (4/4)
– At the end of this initial inflation op-
eration, air will still escape from the
tyre. You must drive a short distance
3 in order to seal the hole.
– Start immediately and drive at
a speed of 12 to 37 mph (20 to
60 km/h) in order to distribute the
product evenly in the tyre; after driv-
ing a distance of 2 miles (3 km), stop
and check the pressure.
– If the pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
but lower than the recommended
pressure (refer to the label affixed to
the edge of the driver’s door), adjust
it. Otherwise, contact an approved
Once the tyre is correctly inflated, dealer: the tyre cannot be repaired.
remove the kit: slowly unscrew the in-
flation end piece of the container 3 to
prevent any product spatter and store
Precautions when using the
kit Following repair with the kit,
the container in plastic packaging to do not travel further than
prevent product leaks. The kit should not be operated for more 120 miles (200 km). In addi-
– Affix the driving recommendation than 15 consecutive minutes. tion, reduce your speed and
label (located under the container) to The container must be replaced after under no circumstances exceed
the dashboard where the driver can the first use even if liquid remains 48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker,
see it. inside. which you must affix in a prominent
position on the dashboard, reminds
– Put the kit away.
you of this.
Depending on the country or local
legislation, a tyre repaired with the
inflation kit may need to be replaced.

5.9
WHEEL TRIM, WHEELS

Central wheel trim with Central wheel trim with

visible wheel bolts visible wheel bolts
(Wheel trim 1) (Wheel trim 2)
The bolts are directly accessible. Remove it using the hubcap tool, by in-
serting the hook near a wheel bolt (refer
to the information on “Tools”).
To put it back, position hooks 4 in rela-
tion to bolts 3. 4
Push in the wheel trim’s retaining
hooks.

5.10
CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)
Place the jack 3 horizontally; the jack
2 head must be lined up with the sill 1
closest to the wheel concerned, as
shown by arrow 2.
Start cranking the jack up by hand to Switch on the hazard warn-
1 align the base plate (which should be ing lights.
pushed slightly under the vehicle). Keep the vehicle away from
Turn the wheelbrace until the wheel lifts traffic and on a level surface
off the ground. where it will not slip.
Remove the bolts. Apply the parking brake and engage
Take off the wheel. a gear (first or reverse, or P for auto-
matic transmissions).
4 Fit the emergency spare wheel on
the central hub and turn it to align the Ask the passengers to leave the ve-
3 mounting holes in the wheel and the hicle and to keep away from traffic.
hub.
Vehicles equipped with a jack
and wheelbrace
If necessary, remove the wheel trim,
refer to the information on “Wheel trims
- Wheels” in this Section. Undo the
wheel bolts using wheelbrace 4. Fit it
so that you press downwards rather
than pulling upwards. If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
If you have a puncture, re- your vehicle’s presence
To prevent any risk of injury place the wheel as soon as with a warning triangle or with other
or damage to the vehicle, possible. devices as per the legislation apply-
only crank the jack until the A tyre which has been punc- ing to the country you are in.
wheel you are replacing is tured should always be inspected
a maximum of 3 centimetres off the (and repaired, where possible) by a
ground. specialist.

5.11
CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
loss warning system
If under-inflated (puncture, low pres-
sure, etc.), the warning light 
lights up on the instrument panel.
5 See “Tyre pressure loss warning” in
Section 2.
9

6
8
7

Tighten the bolts, checking that the

wheel is correctly positioned on its hub
and lower the jack.
With the wheels on the ground, tighten
the bolts firmly, starting on side 5, Do not leave the tools un-
then 7, 9, 6 and ending with 8. Check secured inside the vehicle
the tightness and the tyre pressure on as they may come loose
the emergency spare wheel as soon as under braking. After use,
possible. make sure the tools are correctly
positioned in their housings: risk of
injury.
The jack is designed for wheel
changing purposes only. Under no
Note: ensure that the emergency circumstances should it be used for
spare wheel or punctured wheel and carrying out repairs underneath the
the wheel tray are correctly posi- vehicle or to gain access to the un-
tioned so that the luggage compart- derside of the vehicle.
ment carpet can be properly fitted.

5.12
TYRES (1/4)
Tyre and wheel safety When the tyre tread has been worn
The tyres are the only contact between 1 to the level of the warning strips, they
the vehicle and the road, so it is essen- become visible 2: it is then neces-
tial to keep them in good condition. You sary to replace your tyres because the
must make sure that your tyres con- tread rubber is now only 1.6 mm deep
form to local road traffic regulations. at most, resulting in poor road hold-
ing on wet roads.
An overloaded vehicle, long journeys
by motorway, particularly in very hot
For your safety, please re- weather, or continual driving on poorly
spect the speed limit. 2 surfaced minor roads will lead to more
rapid tyre wear and affect safety.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca- Maintaining the tyres
pacity and a speed capacity at The tyres must be in good condition
least equal to the original tyres, and the tread form must have sufficient
or correspond to those recom- depth; tyres approved by our Technical
mended by your authorised Department have wear warning strips 1
dealer. which are indicators moulded into
Failure to heed these instructions the tread at several points.
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi- Incidents which occur when
ness. driving, such as striking the
Risk of loss of control of the ve- kerb, may damage the tyres
hicle. and wheel rims, and could
also lead to misalignment of the
front or rear axle geometry. If such
incidents occur, have the condition
of these parts checked by an ap-
proved dealer.

5.13
TYRES (2/4)
Tyre pressures Pressures should be checked when the
tyres are cold; ignore higher pressures
Adhere to the tyre pressures (including which may be reached in hot weather
the emergency spare wheel). The tyre or following a fast journey.
pressures should be checked at least If tyre pressures cannot be checked
once a month and additionally before when the tyres are cold, assume an in-
any long journey (refer to the label af- crease of 0.2 to 0.3 bar.
fixed to the edge of the driver’s door).
Never deflate a hot tyre.

Special note
Depending on the vehicle, there may
be an adapter which needs to be posi-
Incorrect tyre pressures tioned on the valve before air is added.
lead to abnormal tyre wear
and unusually hot running.
These are factors which
may seriously affect safety and lead
to:
– poor road holding;
– risk of blowouts or throwing a
tread.
The tyre pressure depends on the
load and speed of use; adjust the Please be aware that a
pressures according to the condi- poorly tightened or miss-
tions of use (refer to the information ing valve cap can make the
on “Tyre pressures” in Section 4). tyres less airtight and may
lead to pressure loss.
Your vehicle is equipped with large Always use valve caps which are
wheels. These are more sensitive identical to the originals.
to imbalance. If you experience vi-
bration while driving, contact an ap-
proved dealer.

5.14
TYRES (3/4)
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure Fitting new tyres
loss warning system
If underinflated (puncture, low pres-

sure, etc.), the warning light
the instrument panel comes on, see
on

“Tyre pressure loss warning system” in

Section 2.

Emergency spare wheel

Refer to the information on “Puncture”
and “Changing a wheel” in Section 5.

Changing wheels around

For safety reasons, this op- 4x4 version
eration must be carried out We recommend that you swap the
by a specialist. wheels regularly in order to ensure that
Fitting different tyres may the tyres wear evenly.
change your vehicle as follows: Swap the wheels as shown in the above
Changing a wheel diagram. Refer to your vehicle’s main-
– it may mean that your vehicle no
As the tyre pressure loss longer conforms to current regu- tenance document for the intervals.
warning system may take lations;
several minutes to cor- 4x2 version
– It may change the way it handles
rectly determine the positions of This practice is not recommended.
when cornering;
the wheels and the pressure values
after driving, check the tyre pres- – It may cause the steering to be
sures following any operation. heavy;
– it may affect the use of snow
chains.

5.15
TYRES (4/4)
Use in winter Snow or Winter tyres
We would recommend that these be
Chains fitted to all four wheels to ensure that
2-wheel drive version (2WD) your vehicle retains maximum adhe-
Snow chains must be fitted to the sion.
front wheels. Warning: These tyres sometimes have
4-wheel drive version (4WD) a specific direction of rotation and a
maximum speed index which may be
Snow chains may be fitted to only the lower than the maximum speed of your
front wheels, or to all four wheels. vehicle.
Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which
are larger than those originally fitted to Studded tyres
the vehicle. This type of equipment may only be
used for a limited period and as laid
down by local legislation.
It is necessary to observe the speed
specified by current legislation.
These tyres must be fitted at least to
both wheels on the front axle or, de-
pending on the country, to all wheels on
the vehicle.

Snow chains may only be In all cases, we would recommend

fitted to tyres of the same that you contact your approved
size as those originally dealer who will be able to advise you
fitted to your vehicle. on the choice of equipment which is
most suitable for your vehicle.

5.16
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (1/3)
Main beam headlight
1 Remove cover B.
Tilt bulb holder 1 to release it and then
replace the bulb.
Type of bulb: H1.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it
B by its base.
A It is essential to use anti-U.V. 55W
bulbs so as not to damage the plastic
on the headlights.
3 2

Dipped beams Before replacing the bulb, for the

dipped beam headlight or the main
Remove cover A. beam headlight, make a careful note of
Tilt bulb holder 3 to release it and then its original position in its housing. After
replace the bulb. changing it, check that the replacement
bulb is in exactly the same position in Please note when work-
Type of bulb: H7. ing close to the engine that
the housing. Clip the cover in place.
After replacing the bulb, please ensure it may be hot. The engine
that the lights are adjusted by a profes- cooling fan may also start
sional.
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.17
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/3)

4 Before performing any

action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).

Direction indicator lights Daytime running light, front

Turn the bulb holder 2 a quarter of a LED side light 4
turn and take out the bulb. Please see an authorised dealer.
Type of bulb: PY21W.

Any operation on (or modi-

fication to) the electrical
system must be performed
by an approved dealer
since an incorrect connection might
damage the electrical equipment
(harness, components and in partic-
ular the alternator). In addition, your
To comply with current legislation, or Dealer has all the parts required for
as a precaution, you can obtain an fitting these units.
emergency kit from your approved
dealer containing a set of spare
bulbs and fuses.

5.18
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (3/3)

8
7

6 5

C 9

Main beam headlight 5 LED dipped beam headlight 6

(depending on the vehicle) (depending on the vehicle)
Remove cover C. Please see an authorised dealer.
Unclip the connector 9, remove the as-
sembly from its housing and take out LED daytime running light/ Please note when work-
the bulb. ing close to the engine that
side light 7 it may be hot. The engine
Type of bulb: H1. (depending on the vehicle) cooling fan may also start
Before replacing the bulb, make a Please see an authorised dealer.
careful note of its position in its hous- at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
ing. After changing it, check that the re-
placement bulb is in exactly the same LED direction indicator minds you of this.
position in the housing. Clip the cover light 8 Risk of injury.
in place. (depending on the vehicle)
Please see an authorised dealer.

5.19
FOG LIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/2)

Front fog lights 1 Refitting

– Access the bulb holder by releasing To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
flap 2; taking care not to damage the wiring.
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn; Once the bulb has been replaced,
– remove the bulb. check that it is properly secured.
Type of bulb: H16 However, we would advise you to Please note when work-
or H11 (depending on the vehicle). have these bulbs replaced by an ing close to the engine that
Approved Dealer. it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
The bulbs are under pres- minds you of this.
To comply with local legislation, or
sure and can break when Risk of injury.
as a precaution, you can obtain an
replaced.
emergency kit containing a set of
Risk of injury. spare bulbs and fuses from an ap-
proved Dealer.

5.20
FOG LIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/2)
Refitting
To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
However, because of their reduced
accessibility, we advise you to have
your bulbs replaced by an approved
Dealer.
3

Rear fog light 3

(depending on vehicle)
Access the bulb holder located under
the rear bumper, then unscrew it by
turning towards the centre of the vehi-
cle and remove the bulb.
Any operation on (or modi-
Bulb type: P21W. fication to) the electrical
system must be performed
by an approved Dealer
since an incorrect connection might
damage the electrical equipment
The bulbs are under pres- (harness, components and in partic-
sure and can break when ular the alternator). In addition, your
replaced. Dealer has all the parts required for
Do not touch the exhaust.
Risk of injury. fitting these units.
Risk of burns.

5.21
REAR LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (1/6)

2
1
A

3
4

Direction indicator lights /

brake and side lights
Open the luggage compartment lid and
remove cover A. Unscrew the nuts 1
and release the clips 2, then pull out
the light unit 3.
Release the connector 4 and unlock the
clips 5 to remove the bulb holder 6.
6

The bulbs are under pres- 5 5

To comply with current legislation, or
sure and can break when
as a precaution, you can obtain an
replaced.
emergency kit from your approved
dealer containing a set of spare Risk of injury.
bulbs and fuses.

5.22
REAR LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/6)

6 7

7
8 10 11
9

7 Direction indicator lights 10 Brake light (depending on the ve- LED side light 11
Type of bulb: WY16W. hicle) (depending on the vehicle)
8 Side light Type of bulb: P21W. Consult an approved dealer.
Pear-shaped, bayonet type P21/5W
bulb with two filaments.
9 Side light and brake light
Pear-shaped, bayonet type P21/5W
bulb with two filaments.

Do not touch the exhaust.

Risk of burns.

5.23
REAR LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (3/6)

13 16
15
12

19
14
13 16

Direction indicator lights/ Brake light 17

brake and side lights Bulb type: P21W.
(depending on the vehicle)
Direction indicators 18
Open the luggage compartment lid and
remove cover A. Unscrew the nuts 1 Bulb type: PY21W.
and release the clips 2, then pull out
the light unit 15. LED side light 19
Release the connector 12 and unlock Consult an approved dealer.
the clips 13 to remove the bulb
holder 14. Release the position con-
nector 16.

17
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
18 Risk of injury.

5.24
REAR LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (4/6)
Refitting
20 To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
However, because of their reduced
21 accessibility, we advise you to have
your bulbs replaced by an Approved
Dealer.
22

Refitting Reversing light 22

To re-fit, proceed in the reverse order (depending on vehicle)
taking care not to damage the wiring, Access the bulb holder located under
tighten nut 20 first, then nut 21. the rear bumper, then unscrew it by
turning towards the centre of the vehi-
cle and remove the bulb.
Type of bulb: P21W.

5.25
REAR LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (5/6)

23
17

24

High-level LED brake light 23 LED number plate light 24

Consult an approved dealer. (depending on vehicle)
Consult an approved dealer

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.26
REAR LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (6/6)

28

27

25

26
Number plate light 25
Unclip light 25 by pressing tab 26 using
a flat-blade screwdriver or similar.
Unclip lens 27 and take out bulb 28.
Bulb type 28: W5W.
However, because of their reduced
accessibility, we advise you to have
your bulbs replaced by an Approved
Dealer.

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.27
INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs

1 B

A 2
3

Unclip the indicator light 1 using a flat-

blade screwdriver or similar positioned
at A to flip the indicator light towards
the outside of the vehicle.
Turn bulb holder 2 a quarter of a turn
(movement B) and take out bulb 3
(movement C).
Bulb type: WY5W or, depending on
the vehicle, W5W.

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.28
INTERIOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/4)

3
1

A 3 5
2 4

Front ceiling light 1 Refitting

– Unclip the lens 2 using a flat screw- – Clip the lens 2 on to the bulb holder 3;
driver-type tool, positioned in A; – clip in the interior lights 1 until the
– unclip and release the bulb holder 3 unit clicks;
using the tabs 4; – ensure that the interior lights are
– remove the bulb concerned. properly positioned and locked into
place.
Type of bulb 5: W5W.
1

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.29
INTERIOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/4)

B
6 B 8
7 B
B 8
9
10

Front map reading lights 6 Refitting

(depending on the vehicle) – Clip the lens 7 on to the bulb holder 8;
– Unclip the lens 7 using a flat screw- – clip in the reading spots block 6 until
driver-type tool, positioned in B; the unit clicks;
– unclip and release the bulb holder 8 – make sure that the reading spots
using the tabs 9; block is correctly positioned and
– remove the bulb concerned. locked into place.
Type of bulb 10: W5W.
6

5.30
INTERIOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/4)

13
11
13
C
14
12 15

Rear reading spot 11 Refitting

(depending on the vehicle) – Clip the lens 12 on to the bulb
– Unclip the lens 12 using a flat screw- holder 13;
driver-type tool, positioned in C; – clip in the reading spots block 11
– unclip and release the bulb holder 13 until the unit clicks;
using the tabs 14; – make sure that the reading spots
– remove the bulb concerned. block is correctly positioned and
locked into place.
Type of bulb 15: W5W.

11
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.31
INTERIOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (4/4)

20
16
18 21

19

17

Glove box light 16 Luggage compartment Release the lens 20 and access
(depending on the vehicle) light 18 bulb 21.
Unclip the light 16 by pressing the Unclip light 18 using a flat-blade screw- Type of bulb 21: W5W.
tab 17 with a flat-blade screwdriver or driver or similar, by pressing on tab 19
similar to move the light towards the to move the light towards the inside of
inside of the unit. the luggage compartment.
Disconnect the light. Disconnect the light.
Type of bulb: W5W. Type of bulb: W5W.

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.

5.32
FUSES (1/4)

A B

5
1 3

2 4

Fuse box Tweezers 5

If any electrical component does not Remove the fuse using the tweezers 5
work, check the condition of the fuses. located on the back of flap 1 or 3.
Unclip the 1 flap using the 2 notch or, To remove the fuse from the tweezers,
depending on the vehicle, unclip the 3 slide the fuse to the side. Check the fuse in question
flap using the 4 notch. and replace it, if necessary,
It is not advisable to use the free fuse with a fuse of the same
Depending on the vehicle, to identify locations. rating.
the fuses, refer to the fuse allocation
label located at the back of the 1 or 3 If a fuse is fitted where the rating is
flap and shown on the following pages. too high, it may cause the electrical
circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the
event of an item of equipment using
To comply with current legislation, or an excessive amount of current.
as a precaution, you can obtain an
emergency kit from your approved
dealer containing a set of spare
bulbs and fuses.

5.33
FUSES (2/4)
Allocation of fuses
(the presence and location of fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)

Symbol Allocation Symbol Allocation

Ì Horn, central alarm unit  Automatic door locking

Left-hand main beam headlight, right-hand

 Front window winder, electric front windows  dipped beam headlight, left-hand daytime run-
ning lights, rear fog lights, side lights

 Rear electric windows  Towbar socket

E Rear screen wash/wipe pump  Rear accessories socket

ABS - ESC, brake switch, clutch switch, engine

 Interior lights, boot light, glovebox light n immobiliser

Energy management unit, electrical locking,

brake lights, main beam headlights, dipped Injection, instrument panel, passenger compart-
U beam headlights, daytime running lights, fog Ä ment unit
lights, side lights

 Multimedia, heated seat  Hands-free access unit

4-wheel drive (4WD) transmission, automatic

ḻ Å Airbag
gearbox

D Direction indicator lights  Light sensor, child safety

 LPG Ṟ Starter

5.34
FUSES (3/4)
Allocation of fuses
(the presence and location of fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)

Symbol Allocation

f Front windscreen wiper

y Passenger compartment ventilation

 Power-assisted steering

 Instrument panel
Use the fuse allocation label in the
Heated rear windscreen, seatbelt warning, park storage compartment to identify the
 assist, additional passenger compartment heat- fuses.
ing, cruise control/speed limiter
Passenger compartment A: the fuse
allocation label is on the rear side of
Radio, air conditioning control panel, passenger the flap 1.
Ṫ compartment ventilation, rear accessories socket Passenger compartment B: the fuse
allocation label is located behind the
 Cigarette lighter glovebox 3.
Certain fuses should only be re-
 Defrosting rear view mirror placed by a qualified professional.
These fuses are not listed on the
 Rear view electric mirrors control label.
Only change the fuses represented
Right-hand main beam headlights, left-hand on the label.
Á
dipped beam headlights, right-hand daytime run-
K ning light, front fog lights, side lights

5.35
FUSES (4/4)

6 Deactivate the Stop and

D Start function for any opera-
tion performed in the engine
Fuses in the engine compartment C LPG fuse in the engine compartment.
and D compartment C
Some functions are protected by fuses LPG fuse 6: LPG circuit shut-off or LPG
located in the engine compartment in circuit and petrol circuit shut-off.
units C and D.
However, because of their reduced Please note when work-
accessibility, we advise you to have ing close to the engine that
your fuses replaced by an approved it may be hot. The engine
dealer. cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
When working in the engine Before performing any minds you of this.
compartment, ensure that action in the engine com- Risk of injury.
the windscreen wiper stalk partment, the ignition must
is in the park position. be switched off (please see
Risk of injury. the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).

5.36
BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/3)
To avoid all risk of sparks: Connecting a battery charger
– Ensure that any power consumers The charger must be compatible
(courtesy lights etc.) are switched off with a battery with a nominal voltage
before disconnecting or reconnect- of 12 volts.
ing a battery; Do not disconnect the battery while the
– when charging, stop the charger engine is running. Follow the instruc-
before connecting or disconnecting tions given by the manufacturer of
the battery; the battery charger you are using.
– to avoid creating a short circuit be- When lots of accessories are fitted to Handle the battery with care
tween the terminals, do not place the vehicle, have them connected to as it contains sulphuric acid,
metal objects on the battery; the + after ignition feed. which must not come into
– always wait at least one minute after contact with eyes or skin. If
the engine has been switched off it does, wash the affected area with
before disconnecting a battery; plenty of cold water. If necessary,
consult a doctor.
– make sure that you reconnect the
battery terminals after refitting. Ensure that naked flames, red hot
objects and sparks do not come into
contact with the battery as there is a
risk of explosion.
Special procedures may be
Please note when working close to
required to charge some
the engine that it may be hot. In ad-
batteries. Contact your au-
dition, the engine cooling fan may
thorised dealer.
Avoid all risk of sparks which may
cause an immediate explosion, and
start at any moment. The 
warning light in the engine compart-
charge the battery in a well venti- ment reminds you of this.
Before performing any lated area.
action in the engine com- Risk of injury.
partment, the ignition must Risk of serious injury.
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).

5.37
BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/3)
Starting the vehicle using the In the event of a battery fault (battery
battery from another vehicle disconnected, discharged, etc.), a reset
of the power-assisted steering must be
If you have to use the battery from an- carried out: refer to the information on
other vehicle to start, obtain suitable “Steering wheel, Power-assisted steer-
jump leads (with a large cross section) ing” in section 1).
from an approved dealer or, if you al-
ready have jump leads, ensure that
they are in perfect condition.
The two batteries must have an iden-
tical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The
battery supplying the current should
have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which
is at least the same as that of the dis-
charged battery.
Ensure that there is no risk of contact
between the two vehicles (risk of short
circuiting when the positive terminals
are connected) and that the discharged
battery is properly connected. Switch
off your vehicle ignition.
Start the engine of the vehicle supply-
ing the current and run it at an interme-
diate engine speed.

5.38
BATTERY: troubleshooting (3/3)

5
Please note when work-
1 4
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
1
B at any moment. The  warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
A 3 Risk of injury.
2

Lift the red cover 5 on the terminal (+) 1.

Attach the positive lead (+) A to the ter-
minal (+) 1 of the discharged battery,
then to the terminal (+) 2 of the battery
supplying the current.
Connect the negative cable (–) B to the
terminal (–) 3 of the battery supplying
the current and then to the terminal –) 4 Check that there is no con-
of the discharged battery. tact between leads A and B
and that the positive lead A
Start the engine as normal. As soon as is not touching any metal
it is running, disconnect leads A and B parts on the vehicle supplying the
in the reverse order (4-3-2-1) current.
Risk of injury and/or damage to
the vehicle.

5.39
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries (1/2)
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-
rect operation, you can still start and
lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to
the information on “Locking/unlocking
the opening elements” in Section 1).

2
1
The batteries are available from ap-
proved Dealers, and their service Replacing the battery
life approximately two years. Open the case at slot 1 using a flat-
Check that there is no dye on the blade screwdriver or similar, and re-
battery: risk of an incorrect electri- place the battery 2, observing the type
cal contact. and polarity shown on the back of the
cover.
Ensure that the cover is correctly
clipped on and the screw tightened.
Note: It is not advisable to touch the When replacing:
When they need to be re- electronic circuit in the key cover when – make sure that the batter-
placed, be sure to use replacing the battery. ies are correctly inserted.
the same or equivalent Risk of explosion.
type of battery (consult an
Approved Dealer). – if the flap does not close cor-
rectly, do not use and keep out of
reach of children.

5.40
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries (2/2)

Precautions relating to
batteries:
– keep (new or used) bat-
teries out of reach of chil-
dren;
– do not swallow batteries;
Risk of chemical burns which
may prove fatal.
– if ingested or inserted into any
part of the body, consult a doctor
as soon as possible.
Do not throw away your used bat-
teries; give them to an organisation
responsible for collecting and recy-
cling batteries.

5.41
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: battery (1/2)
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-
rect operation, you can still start and 1
lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to
the information on “Locking/unlocking A
the opening elements” in Section 1).

When they need to be re-

placed, be sure to use
the same or equivalent 2
type of battery (consult an
Approved Dealer).

Replacing the battery When refitting, proceed in the reverse

order, then press one of the buttons on
When the message “Keycard Battery the card four times, close to the vehicle:
Low” appears on the instrument panel, the message will disappear.
replace the battery in the card:
– slide the rear casing 1 downwards Check that the cover is clipped shut.
while pressing on zone A; Note: Do not touch the electronic circuit
– remove the battery cover 2; or contacts on the card when replacing
– remove the battery by pressing on the battery.
one side and lifting the other;
When replacing:
– replace it according to the direc-
– make sure that the batter- tion and template shown inside the
ies are correctly inserted. cover.
Risk of explosion.
– if the flap does not close cor-
rectly, do not use and keep out of
reach of children.

5.42
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: battery (2/2)

Precautions relating to
batteries:
– keep (new or used) bat-
teries out of reach of chil-
dren;
– do not swallow batteries;
Risk of chemical burns which
may prove fatal.
– if ingested or inserted into any
part of the body, consult a doctor
as soon as possible.

The batteries are available from ap-

proved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years. Check Do not throw away your used bat-
that there is no dye on the battery: teries; give them to an organisation
risk of an incorrect electrical con- responsible for collecting and recy-
tact. cling batteries.

5.43
WIPER BLADES: replacement

1
Check the condition of the wiper
4 blades. You are responsible for their
service life:
A – clean the blades, windscreen and
B rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
3 5 – do not use them when the wind-
screen or rear screen are dry;
2 – free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.

Windscreen wiper blades 1 Replacing the rear screen – In frosty weather, make
Ignition switched off, lift the wiper arm 3, wiper blade 5 sure that the wiper blades
pull tab 2 (movement A) and push the – With the ignition switched off, lift are not stuck by ice (to
blade upwards. wiper arm 4; avoid the risk of the motor
– pivot the blade 5 until some resis- overheating).
Refitting
Slide the blade along the arm until it tance is met; – Check the condition of the wiper
clips on. Check that the bonnet is cor- – pull the blade to release it (move- blades.
rectly locked. The wiper arm on the ment B). Replace the wiper blades as soon
driver’s side must always be on top. Refitting as they begin to lose efficiency
(approximately once a year).
To refit the wiper blade, proceed in re-
verse order to removal. Make sure that Whilst changing the blade, take care
the blade is correctly locked in position. not to drop the arm onto the window
Before changing the wiper after it has been removed as this
blade, make sure the stalk may break the window.
is in the off position (deac-
tivated).
Risk of injury.

5.44
TOWING: breakdown (1/4)
Before towing, put the gearbox in neu- Steering column unlocking
tral, unlock the steering column and re- Insert the key in the ignition-starter
lease the parking brake. switch and turn it to the “On” posi-
For vehicles fitted with an automatic tion. Depending on the vehicle, place
gearbox, if it is not possible to put the the card on the symbol and press the
gear lever into position N, please con- engine start button for two seconds.
sult an authorised dealer. Reposition the lever to neutral (posi-
tion N for vehicles fitted with an auto-
matic gearbox).
The steering column unlocks, the ac-
cessory functions are powered: you
can use the vehicle’s lights (direction – Use a rigid towing bar.
indicators, brake lights, etc.). At night If a rope or cable is used
the vehicle must have its lights on. (where the law allows this),
Depending on the vehicle, once you the vehicle being towed
have finished towing, press the engine must be able to brake.
start button twice (risk of running down – A vehicle must not be towed if it is
the battery). not fit to be driven.
– Avoid accelerating or braking
suddenly when towing, as this
may result in damage being
caused to the vehicle.
– In any case, it is advisable not to
exceed 16 mph (25 km/h).
– Do not push the vehicle if the
steering column is locked.

5.45
TOWING: breakdown (2/4)

3
1

2 4

Front and rear towing points These towing points may only be used
for towing: never use them for lifting the
Only use the front 2 and rear 4 towing vehicle directly or indirectly.
points.
Unclip front 1 or rear 3 cover by insert-
ing a flat-blade screwdriver or similar
under the cover.

Ensure that the towing eye

is bolted correctly. Do not leave the tools unse-
Risk of losing the towed When the engine is stopped, cured inside the vehicle as
object. steering and braking assist- they may come loose under
ance are not operational. braking.

5.46
TOWING: breakdown (3/4)
Off-road recovery
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow
or mud, attach a flexible towing device
(towing belt or other device specially
designed for this purpose) to the front
or rear towing point (refer to the in-
formation on “Front and rear towing
points” on the previous page).

4-wheel drive vehicles (4WD) Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc-

Whichever type of gearbox is fitted, a tions for information on how to fit
4WD vehicle must never be towed if and operate the equipment.
any of its 4 wheels are touching the If a 4x4 (4WD) vehicle becomes
ground. stuck, it should only be towed for a
short distance. Risk of mechanical
damage.

You must never tow a 4-wheel drive For off-road recovery, it

vehicle, irrespective of the mode se- is forbidden to use a rigid
lected, if one of the 4 wheels is in bar to tow a vehicle that is
Do not remove the key from contact with the ground (except for stuck. Risk of mechanical
the ignition when the vehi- off-road recovery). damage.
cle is being towed. Risk of mechanical damage.

5.47
TOWING: breakdown (4/4)
Towing a vehicle with an
automatic gearbox
When the engine is switched off, the
gearbox is no longer lubricated. It is
preferable to tow this type of vehicle 5
on a trailer or, for 4x2 (2WD) vehicles
only, tow it with the rear wheels off the
ground.
Under exceptional circumstances
and for 4x2 (2WD) vehicles only, you
may tow the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, only going forward, with 6
the gear lever in neutral position N and
for a distance not exceeding 31 miles
(50 km).
When setting off, if the lever is locked in
If the gear lever cannot be put into the position P even though you are press-
N position, please consult an author- ing the brake pedal, the lever can be
ised dealer. released manually.
To do this, unclip the base of the lever,
then insert a tool (rigid rod) into the
slot 6 and press simultaneously on the
When storing the tools, button 5 in order to unlick the lever.
ensure they are securely re- Contact an authorised dealer as soon
placed in the luggage com- as possible.
partment, in their original
position.
Do not leave the tools unsecured
inside the vehicle as they may come
loose under braking.

5.48
FITTED AUDIO EQUIPMENT

1
3 4

If your vehicle is not fitted with an audio

system, one can be fitted and locations
have been provided for:
– the radio 1;
– front speakers 2 and 3;
– rear speakers 4.
To install any equipment, please con-
sult an approved dealer.
– In all cases, it is very important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions care-
Radio location 1 fully.
– The specifications of the brackets and wires (available from our network)
Unclip the blanking cover. The aerial, + vary depending on the equipment level of your vehicle and the type of radio.
and – supply and speaker wire connec- Consult an authorised dealer to find out the correct part number.
tions are located behind it. – No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except
by approved Dealers: an incorrectly connected system may result in damage
being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to
it.

5.49
ACCESSORIES

Electrical and electronic accessories

Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, po-
sition of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.
Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 Watts only. Fire hazard. When several accessory sockets are
used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.
No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected
system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.
If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse.
Establish the rating and position of this fuse.

Using the diagnostic socket

The use of electronic accessories on the diagnostic socket may cause serious disturbance to the vehicle’s electronic systems.
For your safety we recommend that you use only electronic accessories approved by the manufacturer, consult an Approved
Dealer. Serious accident risk.

Use of transmitting/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).

Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the
vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform
to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.

Fitting aftermarket accessories

If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of
your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your
vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.
If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regu-
larly. Do not lay one mat on top of another. There is a risk of wedging the pedals.

5.50
OPERATING FAULTS (1/9)

Using the card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The card does not lock or unlock the Card battery is flat. Replace the battery. You can still lock/
doors. unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the
information on “Locking/unlocking the
doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping
the engine” in Section 2).

Use of appliances operating on the Stop using the equipment or use the in-
same frequency as the card (mobile tegrated key (refer to the information on
phone, etc.). “Locking, unlocking the opening elements”
in Section 1).

Vehicle located in a high electromag- Use the key integrated in the card (refer to
netic radiation zone. the information on “Locking, unlocking the
Vehicle battery flat. opening elements” in Section 1).

The message “Place Card Near Place the card on the start symbol until
Symbol + START” appears on the in- the instrument panel message stops being
strument panel. displayed, then press the starting button
within 2 seconds of the message going out.

The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the card’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ig-
nition.

5.51
OPERATING FAULTS (2/9)

Using the card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The card does not lock or unlock the Desynchronisation of the card. Unlock the driver’s door by inserting the key
doors. integrated into the card into the door lock
(see the paragraph on “Locking, unlock-
ing the opening elements” in Section 1),
then place the card on the symbol 4 (see
the paragraph on “Starting, stopping the
engine: vehicle with card” in Section 2) and
press the button 2 to synchronise the card.

5.52
OPERATING FAULTS (3/9)
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact
an approved dealer as soon as possible.

Using the remote control POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION REQUIRED

The remote control does not lock or The remote control battery is flat. Use the emergency key.
unlock the doors.

Use of appliances operating on the same Stop using the devices or use the key.
frequency as the remote control (mobile
phone, etc.).
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic Replace the battery. You can still lock/
radiation zone. unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the
Discharged battery. information on “Locking/unlocking the
doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping
the engine” in Section 2).

The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the key’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the
ignition.

Desynchronisation of the remote control. Unlock the driver’s door using the key in
the door lock, then start the engine to syn-
chronise the remote control.

5.53
OPERATING FAULTS (4/9)
The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The instrument panel indicator lights are Battery terminals not tight, bat- Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them
weak or fail to light up and the starter tery terminals disconnected or if they are oxidised.
does not turn. oxidised.

Discharged battery or not opera- Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer
tional. to the paragraph “Battery: troubleshooting” in sec-
tion 5 or replace the battery if necessary.
Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is
locked.

Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

The engine will not start. Starting conditions are not ful- Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
filled. the engine” in Section 2.

The “hands-free” card does not Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
work. the engine” in Section 2.

With the vehicle stationary, engine cold, Petrol version, this is not neces- The engine’s idle speed should decrease after about
the engine’s idle speed is high. sarily a fault. This may be caused one minute. Otherwise, this may be caused by an-
by the increase in the engine tem- other fault. Consult an approved dealer.
perature.

5.54
OPERATING FAULTS (5/9)
The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The engine cannot be switched off. Card not detected. Press and hold the start button.

Electronic fault. Press the start button quickly five times.

The steering column remains locked. Steering wheel locked. Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine
start button (please refer to Section 2 “Starting, stop-
ping the engine”).

Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

5.55
OPERATING FAULTS (6/9)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Vibrations. Tyres not inflated to correct pres- Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the
sures, incorrectly balanced or dam- problem, have them checked by an ap-
aged. proved Dealer.

White smoke from the exhaust. In the diesel version, this is not neces- Refer to the information on “Special fea-
sarily a fault. Smoke may be caused tures of diesel versions” in Section 2.
by particle filter regeneration.

Petrol version, this is not necessarily Reduce the engine speed and avoid
a fault. Depending on the climate con- sudden acceleration to gradually make the
ditions (cold, humidity etc.), smoke smoke disappear. Otherwise, this may be
may be produced under hard vehicle caused by another fault. Consult an ap-
acceleration. proved dealer.

Smoke under the bonnet. Short-circuit or cooling system leak. Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away
from the vehicle and contact an approved
dealer.

The oil pressure warning light comes

on:

while cornering or braking The level is too low. Top up the engine oil level (refer to the in-
formation on “Engine oil level: topping up/
filling” in Section 4).

is slow to go out or remains lit Loss of oil pressure. Stop the vehicle and contact an approved
under acceleration Dealer.

5.56
OPERATING FAULTS (7/9)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Steering becomes heavy. Assistance overheating. Drive carefully at reduced speed, be aware
Fault with the electric assistance of the level of force in the steering wheel
motor. needed to turn the wheels. Consult an ap-
proved dealer
Fault in the assistance system.

The engine is overheating. The cool- Engine cooling fan not working. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
ant temperature indicator is in the contact an approved dealer.
warning zone and warning light
® comes on.

Coolant leaks. Check the coolant reservoir: it should con-

tain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an
authorised dealer as soon as possible.

Coolant boiling in the coolant reser- Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder Stop the engine.
voir. head gasket. Contact an approved dealer.

Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant when
the engine is very hot. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling
system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved
by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.

5.57
OPERATING FAULTS (8/9)
Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free the blades before using the wipers.

Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer

to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.

The wiper does not stop. Faulty electrical controls. Consult an approved dealer.

Direction indicators flashing more Blown bulb. See information on “Headlights: changing
quickly. bulbs” in section 5.

The direction indicators do not work. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.

Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer

to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.

The lights do not come on or go off. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.

Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer

to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.

5.58
OPERATING FAULTS (9/9)
Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Traces of condensation in the head- Traces of condensation may be a nat-
lights or rear lights. ural phenomenon caused by varia-
tions in temperature and humidity.
In this case, the traces will disappear
slowly once the lights are switched
on.

The front seat belt reminder light An object is stuck between the floor Remove all objects from underneath the
comes on when the seat belts are and the seat and is disrupting the op- front seats.
fastened. eration of the sensor.

5.59
5.60
 Section 6: Technical specifications

Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2

Technical Information for the emergency services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Engine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Weights/Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Replacement parts and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Service sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Anticorrosion check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
6.1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

A 1
2
3
4
5
10 6
9 7
8
A

Quote the details given on identifica- 5 MTR (Gross Train Weight: vehicle
tion plate A on all letters or orders. fully loaded, with trailer).
The presence and location of the in- 6 MMTA (Maximum Permissible
formation depends on the vehicle. Weight) for front axle.
7 MMTA on rear axle.
Vehicle identification plate A 8 Reserved for related or additional
1 Manufacturer name. entries.
2 EC design number or approval 9 Diesel exhaust emissions.
number. Depending on the vehicle, this
3 Identification number. information is not indicated on
Depending on the vehicle, this the manufacturer’s plate but
information is also provided on on the engine smoke opacity
B the marking B. label (refer to the information on
4 MMAC (Maximum Authorised “Special features of Diesel ver-
Mass). sions” in Section 2).
10 Paint reference (colour code).

6.2
TECHNICAL INFORMATION FOR THE EMERGENCY SERVICES

A A

The QR code on the A label allows

emergency workers using a tablet or
smartphone to immediately access the
technical information useful for working
on the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent.
Ensure that the A label is always visible
and present on the windscreen as well
as the rear screen.
Any modification or damage would
prevent access to the information.

6.3
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION (1/2)

1 1

3
A
A

Please quote the engine identifica-

tion information in area A in all cor-
respondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine serial number.

A
A

6.4
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION (2/2)
A
A
1 2

3
A
A A

Please quote the engine identifica-

tion information in area A in all cor-
respondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine serial number.

6.5
DIMENSIONS (in metres)

0,842 2,673 0,826 1,563

0,841 (1) 2,676 (1) 0,824 (1)
4,341

1,626 (2)
1,693 (3)

1,580

2,052
(1) depending on vehicle
(2) unladen, without roof bars
(3) unladen, with roof bars
6.6
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (1/2)

Versions 1.0 TCe 1.2 TCe 1.3 TCe 1.6 16V 2.0 16V 1.5 dCi

Engine type H4Dt H5Ft H5H Turbo H4M F4R K9K

(see engine plate)

Cubic capacity (cc) 999 1 198 1332 1598 1 998 1 461

Type of fuel Petrol Diesel

Octane rating It is essential that you use unleaded petrol of the octane The label located in the fuel filler
rating stated on the label inside the fuel filler flap. flap indicates authorised fuels.

Spark plugs Only use spark plugs specified for your vehicle’s engine.
The type should be marked on a label stuck inside the
engine compartment. If it is not then contact your autho-
rised dealer.
Fitting spark plugs other than those specified may damage
the engine.

6.7
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (2/2)

Versions 1.0 TCe 1.2 TCe 1.3 TCe 1.6 16V 2.0 16V 1.5 dCi

Engine type H4Dt H5Ft H5H H4M F4R K9K

(see engine plate) Turbo

Cubic capacity (cc) 999 1 198 1332 1598 1 998 1 461

Fuel types that meet Unleaded petrol compliant with Diesel fuel compliant with
European standards and standard EN 228 contains up to standard EN 590 contains
are compatible with the en- 5% ethanol in volume. up to 7% fatty acid methyl
gines of vehicles sold in ester in volume.
Europe (in any other case,
contact an Approved Dealer).

Unleaded petrol compliant with Diesel fuel compliant with

standard EN 228 contains up to standard EN 16734 con-
10% ethanol in volume. tains up to 10% fatty acid
methyl ester in volume.

Diesel fuel compliant with

standard EN 15940 con-
tains up to 7% acid methyl
ester in volume.

6.8
WEIGHTS (in kg)
The weights shown are for a basic vehicle without options: they will vary depending on the equipment level of your ve-
hicle. Please consult an authorised dealer.

Versions 4x2 4x4

Maximum Authorised Mass (MMAC) Weights shown on the vehicle identification plate (refer to the
Gross Train Weight (MTR) information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)

Braked Trailer Weight* found by calculating: MTR - MMAC

Unbraked trailer weight* 625 675
Permissible nose weight* 75
Maximum permissible load on roof with a
80 (including the carrying device)
carrying device

*Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)

Towing is prohibited when the GTW - MAM calculation is equal to zero, or when the GTW is equal to zero (or is not listed) on the
identification plate.
– It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in
the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an authorised dealer for any towing equipment modifications.
– For vehicles fitted with a trailer, the gross train weight (vehicle + trailer) must never be exceeded. However, the following
is tolerated:
– the Maximum permissible weight at the rear may be exceeded by no more than 15%,
– the maximum permissible all-up weight may be exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever occurs first).
In either case, the maximum speed of the vehicle and trailer must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) and the tyre pressure must be
increased by 0.2 bar (3 psi).
– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by
10% at an altitude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.
Weight transfer (4x2 versions only)
If the Maximum Authorised Mass of the vehicle has not been reached, up to 300 kg can be transferred to the braked trailer, within
the limits of the Gross Train Weight.

6.9
SPARE PARTS AND REPAIRS
Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same
level of quality as the parts fitted originally.
If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out
within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the
repair order.

6.10
SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

6.11
SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

6.12
SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

6.13
SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

6.14
SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

6.15
SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page

6.16
ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried Stamp

out:

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.17
ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried Stamp

out:

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.18
ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried Stamp

out:

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.19
ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried Stamp

out:

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.20
ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried Stamp

out:

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.21
6.22
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (1/6)
4 blind spot: warning signal ......................................2.69 → 2.72
4 wheel drive (4WD) ..............................................2.37 → 2.41 bonnet......................................................................... 4.2 – 4.3
brake fluid .......................................................................... 4.10
A bulbs
ABS .......................................................................2.42 → 2.46 changing ..........................................................5.17 → 5.32
accessories........................................................................ 5.50
accessories socket ................................................. 3.21 – 3.22 C
additive (reagent)............................................... 1.114 → 1.118 capacity of mechanical components........................... 4.4, 4.16
additive tank capacity ........................................ 1.114 → 1.118 card: battery............................................................ 5.42 – 5.43
adjusting your driving position ...............................1.22 → 1.27 card: use ..................................................................1.5 → 1.11
advice on antipollution ....................................................... 2.30 catalytic converter................................................... 2.17 – 2.18
air bag....................................................................1.28 → 1.34 central door locking ...............................................1.12 → 1.14
air conditioning ........................................................3.2 → 3.14 changing a bulb .....................................................5.17 → 5.32
air vents .....................................................................3.2 → 3.4 changing a wheel.................................................... 5.11 – 5.12
airbag changing fuel while driving ....................................2.21 → 2.24
front passenger airbag deactivation............................. 1.51 changing gear ...............................................2.36, 2.58 → 2.61
anti-corrosion check ..............................................6.17 → 6.21 child booster seat ..................................................1.35 → 1.37
anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.18 child restraint/seat .........1.35 → 1.42, 1.45 – 1.46, 1.49 – 1.50
anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................2.42 → 2.46 child safety............. 1.2, 1.9 → 1.11, 1.16 – 1.17, 1.35 → 1.42,
antipollution 1.45 – 1.46, 1.49 – 1.50, 3.15 → 3.17
advice .......................................................................... 2.30 child seats......................1.35 → 1.42, 1.45 – 1.46, 1.49 – 1.50
armrest children ........................................ 1.5, 1.10 – 1.11, 1.16 – 1.17
front ..................................................................1.19 → 1.21 children (safety) .......................................1.5, 1.9, 3.15 → 3.17
armrest .............................................................................. 3.29 cigar lighter ............................................................. 3.21 – 3.22
ashtrays .................................................................. 3.21 – 3.22 cleaning:
automatic gearbox (use) ...............................2.58 → 2.61, 5.48 inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.21 – 4.22
automatic gearbox selector lever...........................2.58 → 2.61 clock ....................................................................... 1.95 – 1.96
automatic locking of the doors while driving ...................... 1.15 closing the doors ...............................1.12 → 1.14, 1.16 – 1.17
control instruments .... 1.70 → 1.79, 1.95 – 1.96, 1.98 → 1.101
B controls ..............................................1.54 → 1.69, 1.68 – 1.69
batteries ............................................................................. 5.42 courtesy light .......................................................... 3.18 – 3.19
battery cruise control .........................................................2.52 → 2.57
breakdown recovery ........................................5.37 → 5.39 cruise control-speed limiter....................................2.47 → 2.57
battery..................................................................... 4.16 – 4.17
battery (remote control) .......................................... 5.40 – 5.41 D
blind spot warning signal .......................................2.69 → 2.72 dashboard..........................................1.54 → 1.69, 1.68 – 1.69
7.1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (2/6)
de-icing/de-misting engine oil level ...........................................................4.6 → 4.9
windscreen ...........................................................3.5 → 3.8 engine specifications .................................................. 6.7 – 6.8
demisting engine standby ......................................................2.13 → 2.16
rear screen .........................................................3.9 → 3.12 engine start/stop button ...........................................2.7 → 2.12
windscreen .........................................................3.9 → 3.12 environment ....................................................................... 2.31
dimensions .......................................................................... 6.6 ESC: electronic stability control .............................2.42 → 2.46
dipstick........................................................................ 4.4 – 4.5 external temperature ......................................................... 1.96
doors......................................................................1.15 → 1.17
doors/tailgate .............................................................1.5 → 1.7 F
driver assistance....................................................2.73 → 2.78 faults
driver’s position .................................1.54 → 1.69, 1.68 – 1.69 operating faults ................................................5.51 → 5.59
driving ....2.2 → 2.12, 2.17 → 2.20, 2.25 → 2.29, 2.36 → 2.65, filling with reagent .............................................. 1.114 → 1.118
2.73 → 2.78 filter
driving aids ............................................................2.73 → 2.78 air filter ......................................................................... 4.13
driving position diesel filter ..........................................................1.111, 4.13
settings ............................................................1.22 → 1.27 particle filter ........................................................ 2.18, 2.20
driving recommendations ......................................2.25 → 2.29 passenger compartment filter ...................................... 4.13
filter .................................................................................... 4.13
E fitting a radio ...................................................................... 5.49
ECO driving ..................................... 1.70 → 1.75, 2.25 → 2.29 fittings ....................................................................3.25 → 3.29
ECO mode .............................................................2.25 → 2.29 flap
electric beam height adjustment ......................... 1.102 – 1.103 fuel flap ........................................................1.108 → 1.113
electric windows ....................................................3.15 → 3.17 fog lights ............................................................................ 1.99
electronic stability control: ESC .............................2.42 → 2.46 front passenger air bag deactivation ................................. 1.51
emergency brake assist.........................................2.42 → 2.46 front seat adjustment .............................................1.19 → 1.21
emergency braking ................................................2.42 → 2.46 front seats
emergency call ......................................................2.79 → 2.81 adjustment .......................................................1.18 → 1.21
emergency key ..........................................................1.5 → 1.7 fuel
emergency spare wheel ...................... 5.3 → 5.5, 5.13 → 5.16 advice on fuel ...................................................2.25 → 2.29
engine consumption ....................................................2.25 → 2.29
technical specifications ......................................... 6.7 – 6.8 filling .............................................................1.108 → 1.113
engine coolant ................................................................... 4.11 quality ..........................................1.108 → 1.113, 6.7 – 6.8
engine identification plates ......................................... 6.4 – 6.5 fuel consumption ............................................................... 3.13
engine immobiliser (switch) ................................................. 2.2 fuel economy .........................................................2.25 → 2.29
engine oil .................................................................... 4.4 – 4.5 fuel filler cap ......................................................1.108 → 1.113
engine oil grade .........................................................4.6 → 4.9 fuel priming bulb ...............................................................1.111
7.2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (3/6)
fuel tank .............................................................1.108 → 1.113 interior trim
fuel tank capacity ...............................................1.108 → 1.113 maintenance ..................................................... 4.21 – 4.22
fuses ......................................................................5.33 → 5.36 Isofix ....................................................................... 1.49 – 1.50

G J
gear lever........................................................................... 2.36 jack .................................................................. 5.2, 5.11 – 5.12
glove box ........................................................................... 3.28 jets ................................................................................... 1.106
grab handle........................................................................ 3.20
K
H keys ............................................................................ 1.2 – 1.3
handbrake.......................................................................... 2.36
hands-free telephone integrated control ................3.42 → 3.44 L
«hands-free» card: battery ..................................... 5.42 – 5.43 levels .....................................................4.4 – 4.5, 4.10 → 4.12
«hands-free» card: use............................................1.8 → 1.11 levels:
hazard warning lights signal .............................................. 1.97 coolant ......................................................................... 4.11
headlight beam adjustment ................................ 1.102 – 1.103 lifting the vehicle
headlight flashers .............................................................. 1.97 changing a wheel ........................... 5.2 → 5.5, 5.10 → 5.12
headrest......................................................... 1.18, 3.23 – 3.24 lighting:
heated seats ..........................................................1.19 → 1.21 exterior .............................. 1.6, 1.98 → 1.101, 5.17 → 5.28
heated steering wheel ....................................................... 1.91 interior ..........................................3.18 – 3.19, 5.29 → 5.32
heated windscreen ..................................................3.9 → 3.12 lights
heating and air conditioning system ........................3.2 → 3.13 additional .......................................................... 5.20 – 5.21
heating system ........................................................3.2 → 3.14 adjustment .................................................... 1.102 – 1.103
Hill Start Assist.......................................................2.42 → 2.46 lights ....................................................................1.98 → 1.103
horn ................................................................................... 1.97 lights:
hubcap tool .......................................................................... 5.2 adjusting ....................................................... 1.102 – 1.103
brake lights .................................................................. 5.22
I daytime running lights .................................................. 5.17
ignition switch ...................................................................... 2.2 dipped beam headlights ..........................1.98, 5.17 → 5.19
indicator lights.................................................................... 5.28 direction indicators ..................................1.97, 5.17 → 5.19
indicators ......................................................1.97, 5.17 → 5.19 fog lights .................................................. 1.99, 5.20 – 5.21
indicators: hazard warning ............................................................ 1.97
direction indicators ....................................................... 1.97 main beam headlights .............................1.98, 5.17 → 5.19
instrument panel ............................................... 1.78 – 1.79 reversing lights ............................................................. 5.22
instrument panel ....................................................1.70 → 1.90 side lights ................................................1.98, 5.17 → 5.19
instrument panel messages...................................1.78 → 1.90 locking the doors .....................................................1.4 → 1.11

7.3
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (4/6)
LPG . 1.35, 1.78 – 1.79, 1.82 – 1.83, 1.112 – 1.113, 2.4 → 2.7, puncture.................................................5.3 → 5.5, 5.11 – 5.12
2.21 → 2.24, 5.34 → 5.36
Q
M QR Code ............................................................................. 6.3
maintenance ...................................................................... 2.30 quality
maintenance: fuel ...............................................................1.108 → 1.113
bodywork .........................................................4.18 → 4.20
interior trim ........................................................ 4.21 – 4.22 R
mechanical .....................4.4 – 4.5, 4.10, 4.16, 6.11 → 6.16 radio
map reading lights .................................................. 3.18 – 3.19 fitting a radio ................................................................ 5.49
methods of restraint in addition to the front seat belts .............. radio.......................................................................3.42 → 3.44
1.28 → 1.32, 1.34 radio frequency remote control/key
methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.28 → 1.32 use ................................................................................. 1.2
mirrors ............................................................................... 3.20 reagent (tank) .................................................... 1.114 → 1.118
multimedia equipment ...........................................3.42 → 3.44 reagent quality ................................................... 1.114 → 1.118
multi-view camera..................................................2.73 → 2.78 reagent tank....................................................... 1.114 → 1.118
reagent tank cap ................................................ 1.114 → 1.118
N reagent tank capacity ........................................ 1.114 → 1.118
navigation ..............................................................3.42 → 3.44 rear bench seat......................................................3.30 → 3.32
navigation system ..................................................3.42 → 3.44 rear parcel shelf ................................................................. 3.37
rear screen de-icing/demisting ..................................3.5 → 3.8
O rear seats
oil change ..................................................................4.6 → 4.9 functions ..........................................................3.30 → 3.32
opening the doors ..............................1.12 → 1.14, 1.16 – 1.17 rear view camera ...................................................2.66 → 2.68
operating faults ......................................................5.51 → 5.59 rear view mirrors ..................................................... 1.93 – 1.94
overspeed buzzer ................................................... 1.76 – 1.77 remote control door locking
batteries ............................................................ 5.40 – 5.41
P remote control door locking unit ................................1.2 → 1.4
paint remote engine start-up ............................................... 1.2 – 1.3
maintenance ....................................................4.18 → 4.20 replacement parts .............................................................. 6.10
reference ........................................................................ 6.2 reverse gear
parking distance control.........................................2.62 → 2.68 selecting ....................................................................... 2.36
power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.91 reversing sensor ....................................................2.62 → 2.65
practical advice ............... 1.111, 3.36, 5.2 → 5.5, 5.10 → 5.39, roof bars ................................................................3.38 → 3.41
5.44 → 5.49 roof rack
pretensioners .........................................................1.28 → 1.32 roof bars ...........................................................3.38 → 3.41
7.4
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (5/6)
running in ............................................................................. 2.2 technical specifications .....................................6.2, 6.7 → 6.10
telephone ...............................................................3.42 → 3.44
S temperature regulation ............................................3.9 → 3.14
SCR: selective catalytic reduction ..................... 1.114 → 1.118 towing
screens breakdown .......................................................5.45 → 5.48
multimedia screen ............................................2.73 → 2.78 towing equipment ......................................................... 3.36
seat belts ...............................................................1.22 → 1.34 towing .................................................................................. 6.9
seats towing a caravan ................................................................. 6.9
heated seat ......................................................3.30 → 3.32 towing hitch............................................................5.45 → 5.48
service sheets........................................................6.11 → 6.16 towing rings ............................................................ 3.34 – 3.35
signals and lights .................................................1.98 → 1.101 towing weights ..................................................................... 6.9
socket traction control .......................................................2.42 → 2.46
multimedia socket(s) ........................................3.42 → 3.44 transporting children ......1.35 → 1.42, 1.45 – 1.46, 1.49 – 1.50
speakers transporting objects
location ........................................................................ 5.49 in the luggage compartment ............................. 3.34 – 3.35
special features of diesel versions.......................... 2.19 – 2.20 trims ................................................................................... 5.10
special features of LPG versions ...........................2.21 → 2.24 trip computer and warning system.........................1.78 → 1.90
special features of petrol vehicles .......................... 2.17 – 2.18 tyre inflation kit...........................................................5.6 → 5.9
speed limiter ..........................................................2.47 → 2.51 tyre pressure.............................2.32 → 2.35, 4.14 – 4.15, 5.14
spoiler ................................................................................ 3.41 tyre pressure loss warning.....................................2.32 → 2.35
starting .......................................................................2.3 → 2.6 tyre pressures ......................................................... 4.14 – 4.15
starting the engine ...................................................2.2 → 2.16 tyres ............................. 2.32 → 2.35, 4.14 – 4.15, 5.13 → 5.16
steering wheel
adjustment ........................................................ 1.91 – 1.92 U
Stop & Start ...........................................................2.13 → 2.16 unlocking the doors ...............................................1.12 → 1.14
Stop & Start function..............................................2.13 → 2.16
storage compartment.............................................3.25 → 3.29 V
storage compartments ...........................................3.25 → 3.29 variable power-assisted steering ....................................... 1.91
sun visor ............................................................................ 3.20 vehicle identification ............................................................ 6.2
switching on the vehicle ignition .......................................... 2.9 vehicle identification plates .................................................. 6.2
ventilation
T air conditioning .....................................................3.2 → 3.4
tailgate ...................................................................3.33 → 3.35 heating and air conditioning system ....................3.5 → 3.8
tank ventilation ................................................................3.9 → 3.14
Brake fluid .................................................................... 4.10
Coolant ........................................................................ 4.11
7.5
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (6/6)
W
warning buzzer .................................................................. 1.99
warning lights.........................................................1.70 → 1.90
washing .................................................................4.18 → 4.20
weight .................................................................................. 6.9
weights ................................................................................ 6.9
wheelbrace .......................................................................... 5.2
windows .................................................................3.15 → 3.17
windscreen de-icing/demisting ................................3.9 → 3.12
windscreen washer ............................................1.104 → 1.107
wiper blades .............................................1.104 → 1.107, 5.44
wipers
blades .......................................................................... 5.44
wipers ................................................................1.104 → 1.107

7.6